JP2022156266A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To secure the capacity of a control area for performing game control processing.SOLUTION: In a game machine, a CPU reads programs from a ROM, sets, in a first register, a number to be cleared, sets, in a second register, an address specifying information of an output port that is a part of an input/output part, and repeats predetermined processing for the value stored in the first register. The predetermined processing is the processing in which the value stored in an address indicated by the value of the second register is cleared, and in which the second register is updated by a value adding 1 to the value of the second register.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 114

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine that determines by lottery whether or not to give a game profit to a player.

In general, in a gaming machine (pachinko machine), a game ball is shot toward a game area in a game board by a player's steering wheel operation, and a game ball that has flowed down the game area enters a starting hole. A lottery related to the design is executed. Then, the special symbols are variably displayed on the special symbol display device, and the special symbols determined by the lottery are stopped and displayed to inform the player of the result of the lottery. At this time, when a specific special symbol indicating a big hit is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, a big win game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game is started. In this big win game, the attacker device opens and closes a predetermined number of times, allowing game balls to enter the big winning opening, so that the player can receive a lot of payout balls.

In such a game machine, it is desired to effectively utilize the limited storage area of the memory in order to enhance the game playability. For example, there is known a technique of associating management values with control information in a data set table to effectively use memory (for example, Patent Literature 1).

JP 2016-214339 A

In a game machine, a program related to game control processing for controlling the progress of a game must be placed in a use area (control area 4.5 kbytes+data area 3.0 kbytes) in the ROM of the main control board. However, due to the complexity of game information in accordance with the diversity of games, there is a risk that the use area, especially the control area, will be squeezed.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of securing the capacity of a control area for performing game control processing.

In order to solve the above problems, a predetermined board used for progressing a game includes a CPU, a ROM storing a program used by the CPU, a RAM holding variables updated by the program, and the ROM and an input/output unit different from the RAM, the CPU reads the program from the ROM, sets the number to be cleared in a first register, and stores the input An address specifying information of an output port that is a part of the output unit is set, and predetermined processing is repeated for the value stored in the first register, and the predetermined processing is indicated by the value of the second register. This is a process of clearing the value stored at the address and updating the second register with a value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the second register.

The predetermined processing may be a CLRIRS instruction that can be executed without using registers other than the first register and the second register.

According to the present invention, it is possible to ensure the capacity of the control area for performing the game control process.

FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the gaming machine showing a state in which the door according to the simultaneous turning reference example is opened; It is a front view of the gaming machine according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. It is a figure explaining the 2nd big prize-winning hole based on the simultaneous spinning reference example. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of control means for controlling the progress of a game according to the simultaneous spinning reference example; It is an address map of the memory area used by the main CPU according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a diagram for explaining a low-probability jackpot decision random number determination table according to the simultaneous turning reference example. It is a diagram for explaining a high-probability jackpot determination random number determination table according to the simultaneous turning reference example. It is a diagram for explaining a winning symbol random number determination table and a small winning symbol random number determination table according to the simultaneous turning reference example. It is a figure explaining the reach group determination random number determination table based on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining the reach mode determination random number determination table based on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining the variation pattern random number determination table based on the simultaneous rotation reference example. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a variable time determination table according to the simultaneous rotation reference example; It is a figure explaining the game state and variation time based on a simultaneous spinning reference example. FIG. 11 is a first diagram for explaining a special electric accessary product operating ramset table according to the simultaneous rotation reference example; It is a second diagram for explaining the special electric accessary product operating ram set table according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining the game state setting table based on the simultaneous spinning reference example. It is a figure explaining the hit determination random number determination table based on the simultaneous rotation reference example. (a) is a diagram for explaining a normal symbol fluctuation time data table according to a simultaneous turning reference example, and (b) is a diagram for explaining an opening/closing control pattern table according to a simultaneous turning reference example. It is a figure explaining the transition of the game state according to the original game property based on the simultaneous spinning reference example. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating transition of a game state when a game is not properly played according to the simultaneous spinning reference example; It is a figure explaining the gaming machine state flag based on the simultaneous turning reference example. It is the 1st flowchart explaining the CPU initialization process in the main-control board|substrate based on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is the 2nd flowchart explaining the CPU initialization processing in the main-control board|substrate based on the simultaneous rotation reference example. FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining subcommand group set processing in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart for explaining a power-off saving process in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example; FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interrupt processing in the main-control board|substrate based on the simultaneous rotation reference example. 10 is a flowchart for explaining setting-related processing in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example; 10 is a flowchart for explaining switch management processing in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example; It is a flowchart explaining the gate passage process in the main-control board|substrate based on the simultaneous rotation reference example. FIG. 11 is a flow chart for explaining first starting opening passage processing in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example; FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the 2nd starting opening passage process in the main-control board|substrate based on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining a special symbol random number acquisition process in the main control board according to the simultaneous turning reference example. FIG. 11 is a flow chart for explaining effect determination processing at the time of acquisition in the main control board according to the simultaneous turning reference example; FIG. It is a flow chart for explaining the big winning opening passage processing in the main control board according to the simultaneous turning reference example. It is a diagram for explaining a special game management phase and a special electric role product game management phase according to the simultaneous turning reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining a special game management process in the main control board according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining a special symbol variation waiting process in the main control board according to the simultaneous turning reference example. It is a flowchart for explaining a special symbol hit determination process in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining the special symbol variation number determination processing in the main control board according to the simultaneous turning reference example. FIG. 11 is a flowchart for explaining a number cutting management process in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example; FIG. It is a flow chart for explaining a special symbol variation during processing in the main control board according to the simultaneous turning reference example. It is a flow chart explaining the symbol forced stop processing in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining a special symbol stop symbol display process in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining a special electric role product game management process in the main control board according to the simultaneous turning reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining the big winning opening pre-opening processing in the main control board according to the simultaneous turning reference example. FIG. 11 is a flow chart for explaining a big winning opening opening/closing switching process in the main control board according to the simultaneous turning reference example; FIG. It is a flow chart for explaining a large winning opening opening control process in the main control board according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining a large winning opening closing effective process in the main control board according to the simultaneous turning reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining a big winning opening end wait process in the main control board according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. It is a diagram for explaining a normal game management phase according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining normal game management processing in the main control board according to the simultaneous turning reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining normal symbol variation waiting processing in the main control board according to the simultaneous turning reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining the process during normal symbol fluctuation in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining normal symbol stop symbol display processing in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining normal electric accessary prize opening pre-opening processing in the main control board according to the simultaneous turning reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining normal electric accessary prize opening opening and closing switching processing in the main control board according to the simultaneous turning reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining normal electric accessary prize winning opening control processing in the main control board according to the simultaneous turning reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining normal electric accessary prize winning opening closing effective processing in the main control board according to the simultaneous turning reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining normal electric accessory winning opening end wait processing in the main control board according to the simultaneous turning reference example. It is a figure explaining an example of the variation production|presentation of the no reach variation pattern based on the production|presentation reference example. It is a figure explaining an example of the fluctuation production|presentation of the normal reach fluctuation pattern based on the production|presentation reference example. It is a figure explaining an example of the variation production|presentation of the developed reach variation pattern at the time of loss based on the production|presentation reference example. It is a figure explaining an example of the variation production|presentation of the development reach variation pattern at the time of a big hit based on the production|presentation reference example. It is a figure explaining an example of a variable production|presentation in case the ready-to-reach development production|presentation based on a production|presentation reference example is performed twice. It is a figure explaining an example of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the pseudo continuous ready-to-reach fluctuation pattern based on the production|presentation reference example. It is a figure explaining the variable production|presentation determination table based on the production|presentation reference example. It is a figure explaining an example of the pending|holding display production|presentation based on the production|presentation reference example. (a) is a diagram for explaining a final pending display pattern determination table according to a reference example of production, and (b) is a diagram for explaining a immediately previous pending display pattern determination table according to a reference example of production. It is a flowchart explaining the sub CPU initialization process in the sub control board which concerns on the production|presentation reference example. It is a flow chart explaining the sub-timer interrupt processing in the sub-control board according to the effect reference example. It is a flow chart explaining the look-ahead designation command reception processing in the sub-control board according to the effect reference example. It is a flow chart explaining the variation command reception processing in the sub-control board according to the effect reference example. 1 is an external view for explaining a schematic mechanical configuration of a slot machine; FIG. FIG. 2 is an external view of the slot machine with the front door opened, for explaining the schematic mechanical configuration of the slot machine; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining symbol arrays on reels and activated lines; 1 is a block diagram showing a schematic electrical configuration of a slot machine; FIG. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a winning combination. It is a figure which shows a prize type lottery table. It is a figure which shows a prize type lottery table. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the transition of the game state. It is an explanatory view for explaining the transition of the production state. It is a flow chart explaining CPU initialization processing in a main control board. 4 is a flowchart for explaining cold start processing in the main control board; It is a flow chart explaining error stop processing in a main control board. 4 is a flowchart for explaining set value switching processing in a main control board; It is a flow chart explaining initialization start processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the state return processing in a main control board. It is a flow chart explaining the game start processing in the main control board. It is a flow chart explaining game medal insertion processing in the main control board. It is a flow chart explaining internal lottery processing in a main control board. It is a flow chart explaining the design code setting processing in the main control board. FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining processing during rotation of the drum in the main control board; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart for explaining a spinning drum stopping process in a main control board; FIG. It is a flow chart explaining display judging processing in a main control board. It is a flow chart explaining the payout process in the main control board. It is a flow chart explaining the game transition processing in the main control board. FIG. 10 is a flow chart for explaining save processing at power-off in the main control board; FIG. It is a flow chart explaining timer interruption processing in a main control board. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining electrical connections around a main CPU; 2 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of a CPU core; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram explaining the configuration of a register; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a memory map; FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining usage modes of access methods; 9 is a flowchart for explaining an example of subcommand transmission processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of specific commands for realizing subcommand transmission processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of another command for realizing subcommand transmission processing; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing part of a command group for implementing CPU initialization processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a table referred to in CPU initialization processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing another example of part of a command group for implementing CPU initialization processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing another example of a table referred to in CPU initialization processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing another example of part of a command group for implementing CPU initialization processing; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing addresses of output ports; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a part of a command group for realizing save processing at power-off; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing another example of a part of a command group for realizing save processing at power-off;

Preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings. The dimensions, materials, and other specific numerical values shown in these embodiments are merely examples for facilitating understanding of the invention, and do not limit the invention unless otherwise specified. In the present specification and drawings, elements having substantially the same function and configuration are given the same reference numerals to omit redundant description, and elements that are not directly related to the present invention are omitted from the drawings. do.

In the embodiment of the present invention, a pachinko machine and a slot machine will be exemplified in that order as gaming machines, and then specific processing will be described in detail.

<Pachinko machine>
In order to facilitate understanding of the embodiments of the present invention, first, as a reference example of simultaneous rotation, the mechanical configuration and electrical configuration of a so-called simultaneous rotation machine, and specific processing for each substrate will be described. Then, as an effect reference example, a specific effect that can be executed in the simultaneous spinning machine and a specific process related to the effect will be described. After that, as examples of the present invention, configurations different from each reference example will be specifically described.

<Simultaneous rotation reference example>
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a gaming machine 100 according to a simultaneous turning reference example, showing a state in which the door is opened. As shown, the game machine 100 includes an outer frame 102 in which a space is formed by four sides assembled in a substantially rectangular shape, a middle frame 104 attached to the outer frame 102 by a hinge mechanism so as to be freely opened and closed, and the A front frame 106 attached to the middle frame 104 by a hinge mechanism so as to be openable and closable is provided.

Similarly to the outer frame 102, the middle frame 104 has a surrounding space formed by four sides assembled in a substantially rectangular shape, and a game board 108 is held in this surrounding space. Further, the front frame 106 holds a transmission plate 110 made of glass or resin. When the middle frame 104 and the front frame 106 are closed with respect to the outer frame 102, the game board 108 and the transmission plate 110 face each other substantially parallel to each other while maintaining a predetermined distance. , the game board 108 becomes visible through the transparent plate 110 .

FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming machine 100 according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. As shown in this figure, an operation handle 112 projecting toward the front side of the gaming machine 100 is provided at the lower portion of the front frame 106 . The operating handle 112 is provided so that the player can rotate it, and when the player rotates the operating handle 112 to perform a shooting operation, the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the operating handle 112 is applied (not shown). A game ball is shot by the shooting mechanism. The game ball shot in this manner rises between rails 114 a and 114 b provided on the game board 108 and is guided to the game area 116 .

The game area 116 is a space formed between the game board 108 and the transmission plate 110, and is an area in which game balls can flow down or roll. A large number of nails and pinwheels (not shown) are provided on the game board 108, and a game ball guided to the game area 116 collides with the nails and pinwheels to flow down and roll in irregular directions. I have to.

The game area 116 is provided with a first game area 116a and a second game area 116b in which the degree of penetration of the game ball is different from each other according to the firing intensity of the shooting mechanism, and the game ball can be hit separately. The first game area 116a is located on the left side of the game area 116 when viewed from the player facing the gaming machine 100, and the second game area 116b is located on the left side of the game area 116 when viewed from the player facing the gaming machine 100. located on the right side of the Since the rails 114a and 114b are located on the left side of the game area 116, the game ball fired by the shooting mechanism with a shooting intensity lower than a predetermined intensity enters the first game area 116a and is shot with a shooting intensity equal to or higher than the predetermined intensity. The played game ball enters the second game area 116b.

In addition, the game area 116 is provided with a general winning opening 118 into which a game ball can enter, a first fixed starting opening 120A, a first variable starting opening 120B, a second starting opening 122, and a normal figure operating opening 125. , These general winning opening 118, the first fixed starting opening 120A, the first variable starting opening 120B, the second starting opening 122, when the game ball enters the normal figure operation opening 125, predetermined prize balls are paid out to the player respectively. be In addition, below, 120 A of 1st fixed starting openings and the 1st variable starting opening 120B are generically called the 1st starting opening 120. As shown in FIG.

Although details will be described later, a first start-up region is provided within the first start-up port 120 and a second start-up region is provided within the second start-up port 122 . Then, when the game ball enters the first start port 120 or the second start port 122 and enters the first start area or the second start area, one of a plurality of special symbols provided in advance is selected. A lottery is held to determine 1 special symbol. Each special symbol is associated with whether or not it is possible to execute a big winning game or a small winning game that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, when a game ball enters the first start hole 120 or the second start hole 122, the player can obtain a predetermined prize ball and at the same time obtain an opportunity to obtain rights to receive various game benefits. becomes.

In addition, the first fixed starting opening 120A, the second starting opening 122 and the normal figure operating opening 125 are constituted by fixed starting openings that are open so that the game ball can be entered at all times. On the other hand, the first variable starting port 120B is provided with a movable piece 120b that can be opened and closed, and the ease with which a game ball enters the first variable starting port 120B changes according to the state of the movable piece 120b. It consists of a variable starting port. Specifically, the movable piece 120b is normally maintained in a closed state, and during this time, it becomes difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter the first variable starting port 120B.

On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the gate 124 provided in the game area 116 (second game area 116b) or the game ball enters the normal pattern operation port 125, the lottery of the normal symbol described later is performed. If a winning lottery is won by this lottery, the movable piece 120b is controlled to be open for a predetermined period of time. When the movable piece 120b is in an open state, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the first variable starting port 120B. In this way, the movable piece 120b is in an open state that allows the game ball to enter the first variable starting port 120B, and makes it more difficult for the game ball to enter the first variable starting port 120B than in the open state. Alternatively, it functions as a movable member (start variable winning device) that shifts to an impossible closed state.

In addition, the first fixed starting port 120A can enter only the game ball that flows down the first game area 116a, and the first variable starting port 120B and the second starting port 122 are the games that flow down the second game region 116b. It is arranged in a position where only the ball can enter. In addition, the game ball flowing down the second game area 116b may enter the first fixed starting port 120A, but in this case, the game ball flowing down the first game area 116a is the second It is desirable to arrange the game area 116b at a position where it is easier to enter the game ball than the game ball flowing down.

Similarly, the first variable starting port 120B and the second starting port 122 may enter the game ball that flows down the first game area 116a, but in this case, the game that flows down the second game area 116b It is desirable that the ball be arranged at a position where it is easier to enter than the game ball flowing down the first game area 116a. In any case, the first fixed starting port 120A is arranged at a position where at least the game ball flowing down the first game area 116a can enter, and the first variable starting port 120B and the second starting port 122 are at least the first It is preferable that the game ball flowing down the second game area 116b is arranged at a position where it can enter.

Further, a first big winning opening 126 and a second big winning opening 128 are provided in the second game area 116b. The first big winning hole 126 and the second big winning hole 128 are arranged at positions where only game balls flowing down the second game area 116b can enter. However, the first big winning hole 126 and the second big winning hole 128 may be arranged so that any game ball flowing down the first game area 116a and the second game area 116b can enter.

An opening/closing door 126b is provided in the first big winning hole 126 so that it can be opened and closed. Ball is not possible. Specifically, when the opening/closing door 126b is in a closed state, it is flush with the board surface of the game board 108, and the game balls flow down in front of the first big winning hole 126. As shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned big win game is executed, the opening and closing door 126b is opened and functions as a tray for guiding the game ball to the first big winning hole 126, and the game ball enters the first big winning hole 126. ball becomes possible. When a game ball enters the first big winning hole 126, a predetermined prize ball is paid out to the player.

The second big winning hole 128 is provided below the first big winning hole 126 in the second game area 116b. The second big prize winning opening 128 has a movable piece 128b, and normally the movable piece 128b is maintained in a closed state. On the other hand, when a small winning game, which will be described later, is executed, the movable piece 128b is controlled to be in an open state, and a game ball can enter the second big winning hole 128. As shown in FIG. In addition, hereinafter, the first big prize opening 126 and the second big prize opening 128 are collectively referred to simply as the big prize opening.

FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the second big winning opening 128 according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. A structure 129 projecting to the front side of the game board 108 is provided in the second game area 116b. The structure 129 surrounds the gaming machine 100 on four sides positioned in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction and the bottom side, and an opening is formed at the top. An opening formed in the upper part of this structure 129 serves as the second prize winning opening 128 . A movable piece 128b is provided on the upper part of the structure 129, and normally, as shown in FIG. .

The movable piece 128b faces above the game machine 100 and protrudes into the game area 116 where the game ball rolls and flows down. Therefore, when the movable piece 128b is maintained in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the game area 116 (second game area 116b) falls on the movable piece 128b. Here, the base of the structure 129 is substantially parallel to the horizontal direction, and the right side of the gaming machine 100 is slightly longer in the height direction than the left side. Therefore, the left side of the gaming machine 100 is slightly lower than the right side of the second big winning opening 128, and the movable piece 128b maintained in the closed state is positioned so that the left side of the gaming machine 100 is slightly lower than the right side. inclined to Therefore, when the movable piece 128b is in the closed state, as indicated by the arrow in FIG. will move.

Then, when a small winning game, which will be described later, is executed, the movable piece 128b shifts to an open state in which the second big winning opening 128 is opened. Here, as shown in FIG. 3(b), the movable piece 128b slides toward the back side of the game board 108 to change from the closed state to the open state. As a result, when the closed state is changed to the open state, the game ball rolling on the movable piece 128b falls into the second big winning hole 128 by its own weight.

Thus, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, the movable piece 128b is slightly inclined to ensure a long time for the game ball to roll on the movable piece 128b. Then, the game ball rolling on the movable piece 128b is guided into the second big winning hole 128 by changing the movable piece 128b from the closed state to the open state. With the above configuration, even if the time for keeping the movable piece 128b in the open state is set slightly, a predetermined number of game balls can be guided into the second big winning hole 128. FIG. In other words, the time for which the movable piece 128b is kept open, which is required for entering a predetermined number of game balls into the second big winning hole 128, can be shortened. A hole communicating with the back side of the game board 108 is formed in the back side of the structure 129, and the game ball entering the second big winning hole 128 is discharged to the back side of the game board 108. . Then, when a game ball enters the second big winning hole 128, a predetermined prize ball is paid out to the player.

Although the configuration of the second big winning opening 128 has been described here, the first variable starting opening 120B also has the same configuration as the second big winning opening 128 . That is, the movable piece 120b of the first variable starting port 120B projects toward the front side of the game board 108 in the closed state, and the game ball rolls on the movable piece 120b. In the open state of the movable piece 120b, the movable piece 120b slides to the back side of the game board 108, allowing the game ball to enter the first variable starting port 120B. However, as shown in FIG. 2, the right side of the movable piece 128b is higher than the left side when the game machine 100 is viewed from the front, while the left side of the movable piece 120b is the right side when the game machine 100 is viewed from the front. located higher than

Here, the board configuration of the second game area 116b will be described in detail. In the simultaneous turning reference example, the second starting port 122 and the gate 124 are arranged in parallel at the top of the second game area 116b. All the game balls guided to the second game area 116b enter the second starting port 122 or pass through the gate 124 and flow downward. In the simultaneous spinning reference example, the second starting port 122 pays out one game ball as a prize ball for one game ball entering.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 122, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a big winning game or a small winning game is executed. Further, when the game ball passes through the gate 124, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the first variable starting port 120B (movable piece 120b) is to be opened.

A first big winning opening 126 is provided directly below the second starting opening 122 and the gate 124 . When the first big winning hole 126 is in the open state, all the game balls that have flowed down through the gate 124 are arranged to enter the first big winning hole 126 . In the simultaneous spinning reference example, the first big winning opening 126 is opened only in the big win game. In other words, the first big winning hole 126 can be said to be a big winning hole dedicated to big role games. When a game ball enters the first big winning hole 126 during a big win game, a predetermined number of two or more (here, 15) game balls are paid out as prize balls for one game ball entering. .

A first variable starting opening 120B is provided below the first big winning opening 126 . In addition, an out port 131 is provided between the first big winning port 126 and the first variable starting port 120B. The out port 131 is an entrance of a passage for discharging game balls from the game area 116, and even if a game ball enters the out port 131, prize balls are not paid out.

Nails are arranged in the second game area 116b so that most of the game balls (for example, 90% or more) that have flowed downward from the first big winning hole 126 fall onto the movable piece 120b. In addition, a portion (eg, 1% to 10%) of the game balls that have flowed downward from the first big winning hole 126 are guided to the out hole 131 by these nails.

In the closed state of the first variable starting port 120B, the game ball rolls on the movable piece 120b. When the movable piece 120b is opened while the game ball is rolling on the movable piece 120b, all the game balls on the movable piece 120b are guided into the first variable starting port 120B. When a game ball enters the first variable starting port 120B, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball for one game ball entering, and whether or not to execute a big win game or a small win game is determined. A lottery will be held.

A game ball that does not enter the first variable starter opening 120B falls from the movable piece 120b to the right side of the game machine 100 when viewed from the front. Below the first variable starter opening 120B, a second large winning opening 128 is provided, and most of the game balls dropped from the movable piece 120b roll on the movable piece 128b of the second large winning opening 128. do. The game ball on the movable piece 128b rolls slowly from the right side to the left side in the front view of the gaming machine 100 due to the inclination of the movable piece 128b.

Although details will be described later, in the simultaneous spinning reference example, the second big winning opening 128 is opened only in the small winning game. That is, the second big winning hole 128 can be said to be a big winning hole dedicated to small winning games. When the movable piece 128b is opened while the game ball is rolling on the movable piece 128b, all the game balls on the movable piece 128b are guided into the second big winning opening 128.例文帳に追加When a game ball enters the second big winning hole 128 during a small winning game, a predetermined number of two or more (here, 15) game balls are paid out as prize balls for one game ball entering. be

A normal figure operation opening 125 is provided at the lower left of the second big winning opening 128 . Here, a nail is arranged in the second game area 116b so that almost all of the game balls dropped downward from the second big winning hole 128 enter the normal figure operation hole 125.例文帳に追加In the simultaneous turning reference example, the normal figure operation opening 125 constitutes a "specific winning opening" in which one game ball is paid out as a prize ball for one game ball entry. In addition, when the game ball enters the normal figure operation port 125, similarly to the case where the game ball passes through the gate 124, it is determined whether the first variable start port 120B (movable piece 120b) is opened. A lottery will be held.

In addition, at the bottom of the game area 116, a game ball that did not enter any of the general winning opening 118, the first starting opening 120, the second starting opening 122, the normal drawing opening 125, and the big winning opening is provided from the game area 116 to the back side of the game board 108.

The game machine 100 includes a performance display device 200 made of a liquid crystal display device, a performance accessory device 202 made of a movable device, and various lighting modes and light emission colors as performance devices for performing performance during the progress of the game. An effect lighting device 204 made up of a lamp, a sound output device 206 made up of a speaker, and an effect operation device 208 that accepts the player's operation are provided.

The effect display device 200 includes a main effect display portion 200a consisting of an image display portion for displaying an image. placed as possible. In the main effect display section 200a, as shown in the figure, various effects such as three effect patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are variably displayed.

The effect accessory device 202 is arranged in front of the main effect display unit 200a, and is usually retracted at the origin position on the back side of the game board 108 in a state of being divided into a plurality of constituent members. It is no longer visible. During the variable display of the performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c, when each constituent member moves to a movable position in front of the main effect display section 200a by driving the actuator, the front surface of the main effect display section 200a Each constituent member is united to give the player a feeling of anticipation of a big win.

The effect lighting device 204 is provided in the effect accessory device 202, the game board 108, etc., and is variously controlled to be lit according to the image displayed on the main effect display section 200a.

The audio output device 206 is provided at an upper position of the front frame 106 or a lowermost position of the outer frame 102, and outputs various sounds toward the front side of the gaming machine 100 according to the image displayed on the main effect display section 200a. Output audio.

The effect operation device 208 is composed of a button that receives a player's pressing operation, and is provided at a substantially central position in the width direction of the gaming machine 100 and at a position lower than the transmission plate 110 . This effect operation device 208 is activated in accordance with the image displayed on the main effect display section 200a, and when the player's operation is received within the operation effective time, various operations are performed according to the operation. A performance is performed.

In the figure, reference numeral 132 denotes an upper plate into which prize balls paid out from the gaming machine 100 and game balls rented from the game ball lending device are guided. It will be guided to the lower plate 134 . Also, the bottom surface of the lower tray 134 is formed with a ball removal hole (not shown) for ejecting game balls from the lower tray 134 . This ball extraction hole is normally closed by an opening/closing plate (not shown), but when the ball removal knob 134a is pressed down, the opening/closing plate slides together with the ball removal knob 134a to open the ball removal hole. It is possible to discharge the game ball from the lower tray 134 from the bottom.

In addition, on the game board 108, a first special symbol display device 160, a second special symbol display device 162, a first special symbol holding device, and a first special symbol display device 160, a second special symbol display device 162, and a first special symbol reserve are provided outside the game area 116 and at positions visible to the player. A display device 164, a second special symbol reservation display device 166, a normal symbol display device 168, a normal symbol reservation display device 170, and a right-handed information display device 172 are provided. Each of these displays 160 to 172 is a device for displaying various situations relating to the game, and the details thereof will be described later.

(Internal configuration of control means)
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of control means for controlling the progress of a game according to the simultaneous spinning reference example.

The main control board 300 controls the basic operations of the game. The main control board 300 includes a main CPU 300a, a main ROM 300b, and a main RAM 300c. The main CPU 300a reads the program stored in the main ROM 300b based on the input signals from the detection switches and timers and performs arithmetic processing, and directly controls each device and display, or the result of the arithmetic processing. Send commands to other boards accordingly. The main RAM 300c functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the main CPU 300a.

The main control board 300 includes a general winning opening detection switch 118s for detecting that a game ball has entered the general winning opening 118, and a first fixed opening for detecting that a game ball has entered the first fixed starting opening 120A. A starting port detection switch 120As, a first variable starting port detection switch 120Bs that detects that a game ball has entered the first variable starting port 120B, and a second variable starting port that detects that a game ball has entered the second starting port 122. A start opening detection switch 122s, a gate detection switch 124s that detects that a game ball has passed through the gate 124, a normal diagram operation opening detection switch 125s that detects that a game ball has entered the normal diagram operation opening 125, a first large A first big winning hole detection switch 126s for detecting that a game ball has entered the winning hole 126 and a second big winning hole detection switch 128s for detecting that a game ball has entered the second big winning hole 128 are connected. A detection signal is input to the main control board 300 from each of these detection switches.

In addition, the main control board 300 includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 120c that operates the movable piece 120b of the first variable starting port 120B, and a first big prize winning port that operates the open/close door 126b that opens and closes the first big prize winning port 126. The solenoid 126c and the second big prize winning opening solenoid 128c that operates the movable piece 128b that opens and closes the second big winning opening 128 are connected. Opening and closing control of the winning opening 126 and the second big winning opening 128 is performed.

Furthermore, the main control board 300 includes a first special symbol display 160, a second special symbol display 162, a first special symbol reservation display 164, a second special symbol reservation display 166, a normal symbol display 168, and a normal symbol display. A symbol holding indicator 170 and a right-handed information indicator 172 are connected, and the main control board 300 controls the display of each of these indicators.

Furthermore, on the back surface of the game board 108, a setting change switch 180s is provided. The setting change switch 180s is configured to be accessible with a dedicated key. Under the condition that the setting change switch 180s is turned on, the setting value can be changed and confirmed. Although the details will be described later, in the gaming machine 100 of the simultaneous spinning reference example, one of six levels of setting values with different degrees of advantage is stored as a registered setting value in the setting value buffer, and according to the stored registered setting value, Game progresses. Here, it is assumed that there are six levels of setting values, but the setting values may be provided in only two levels of high setting and low setting, or may be provided in a plurality of other levels. Furthermore, the set value is not essential, and the advantage level does not have to be changed.

Further, a RAM clear button is provided on the back surface of the game board 108 so that it can be pressed, and the RAM clear switch 182s detects the pressing operation of the RAM clear button. The RAM clear switch 182s is connected to the main control board 300, and a RAM clear operation signal is input to the main control board 300 from the RAM clear switch 182s. If a RAM clear operation signal is input from the RAM clear switch 182s when power is turned on, the main CPU 300a clears the main RAM 300c.

A performance display monitor 184 is provided on the back of the game board 108 . The main control board 300 displays the registered set values and the base ratio on the performance display monitor 184 .

In addition, the gaming machine 100 of the simultaneous spinning reference example mainly includes a special game that is started by entering a game ball into the first start port 120 or the second start port 122, passing the game ball through the gate 124, or , It is roughly divided into a normal game that is started by entering a game ball into the normal pattern operation port 125. The main ROM 300b of the main control board 300 stores various programs for progressing special games and normal games, data necessary for various games, and tables.

A payout control board 310 and a sub control board 330 are connected to the main control board 300 . The payout control board 310 performs control for shooting game balls and payout prize balls. This payout control board 310 also includes a CPU, ROM, and RAM, and is connected to the main control board 300 so as to be able to communicate bidirectionally. A game information output terminal board 312 is connected to the payout control board 310 , and various information on the progress of the game output from the main control board 300 is transmitted via the payout control board 310 and the game information output terminal board 312 . , is output to a hall computer or the like of the amusement arcade.

The payout control board 310 is also connected with a payout motor 314 for paying out the game balls stored in the storage portion to the player as prize balls. The payout control board 310 controls the payout motor 314 based on the payout number designation command transmitted from the main control board 300 to pay out predetermined prize balls to the player. At this time, the number of put-out game balls is detected by the put-out ball counting switch 316s, and it is grasped whether the prize balls to be put out have been put out to the player.

Further, the payout control board 310 is connected with a full-dish detection switch 318 s for detecting the full state of the lower tray 134 . This plate full detection switch 318 s is provided in a passage leading game balls paid out as prize balls to the lower plate 134 , and a game ball detection signal is input to the payout control board 310 .

Then, when the lower tray 134 is filled with a predetermined amount or more of game balls, the game balls stay in the passage toward the lower tray 134, and are directed toward the payout control board 310 from the tray full detection switch 318s. , the game ball detection signal is continuously input. The payout control board 310 determines that the lower tray 134 is full when the game ball detection signal is continuously input for a predetermined period of time, and transmits a full tray command to the main control board 300 . On the other hand, when the continuous input of the game ball detection signal is interrupted after the full-dish command is transmitted, it is determined that the full-drained state is canceled, and the full-dish full-drain release command is transmitted to the main control board 300 .

Also, the payout control board 310 is provided with a launch control circuit 320 for controlling the launch of game balls. The payout control board 310 is connected with a touch sensor 112s provided on the operating handle 112 for detecting that the player touches the operating handle 112, and an operation volume 112a for detecting the operating angle of the operating handle 112. ing. Then, when a signal is input from the touch sensor 112s and the operation volume 112a, the shooting control circuit 320 controls the shooting solenoid 112c provided in the game ball shooting device to energize and shoot the game ball.

The sub-control board 330 mainly controls each effect such as during a game or during standby. The sub-control board 330 includes a sub-CPU 330a, a sub-ROM 330b, and a sub-RAM 330c, and is connected to the main control board 300 so as to be able to communicate in one direction from the main control board 300 to the sub-control board 330. . The sub CPU 330a reads the program stored in the sub ROM 330b based on the command transmitted from the main control board 300, the input signal from the timer, etc., performs arithmetic processing, and executes and controls the performance. At this time, the sub-RAM 330c functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the sub-CPU 330a.

Specifically, in the sub-control board 330, the sub-CPU 330a, the sub-ROM 330b, and the sub-RAM 330c cooperate to function as a sub-main, an image control section, a character control section, a lighting control section, and a sound control section. The sub-main decides the content of the effect to be executed, and manages and supervises the execution of the effect according to various input commands. The image control section performs image display control for displaying an image on the main effect display section 200a. The sub-ROM 330b stores a large amount of image data such as patterns, backgrounds, subtitles, etc. displayed on the main effect display section 200a. It controls the image display of the effect display section 200a.

In addition, the accessory control unit drives the actuator according to the management of the presentation by the sub-main, and controls the movement of the presentation accessory device 202 . The lighting control unit controls lighting of the production lighting device 204 . Also, the audio control unit performs audio output control for outputting audio from the audio output device 206 . The sub-ROM 330b stores a large amount of audio data such as sounds and music output from the audio output device 206, and the audio control unit reads the audio data from the sub-ROM 330b and controls the audio output of the audio output device 206. do.

Further, the sub-control board 330 executes a predetermined effect when an operation detection signal is input from the effect operation device detection switch 208s that detects that the effect operation device 208 has been pressed or rotated.

A power supply board (not shown) is connected to each board, and power is supplied to each board from a commercial power supply via the power supply board. Also, the power supply board is provided with a backup power supply comprising a capacitor.

FIG. 5 is an address map of a memory area used by the main CPU 300a according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. In FIG. 5, addresses are shown in hexadecimal numbers, and "H" indicates hexadecimal numbers. As shown in FIG. 5, the memory area used by the main CPU 300a includes a memory area (0000H to 2FFFH) allocated to the main ROM 300b and a memory area (F000H to F3FFH) allocated to the main RAM 300c.

The memory area of the main ROM 300b consists of a use area (0000H to 1BF3H) for storing programs and data for controlling the progress of the game, and an area other than the use area, which is used for processing for performing tests stipulated by gaming machine regulations. and an unused area (2000H to 2BFFH) for storing programs and data for executing processing for displaying the performance display monitor 184 (including processing for calculating the base ratio to be displayed on the performance display monitor 184) and are provided.

The area used in the main ROM 300b includes a program area (0000H to 0A89H) that stores programs for controlling the progress of games, an unused area (0A8AH to 11FFH), and a data area (1200H) that stores data other than programs. ~1BF3H) are provided. Note that the used area may not include the unused area (0A8AH to 0FFFH).

The non-use area of the main ROM 300b is a program area (2000H to 27FFH) for storing programs for executing processes for performing tests stipulated by game machine regulations and processes for displaying the performance display monitor 184, A data area (2800H to 2BFFH) is provided for storing data other than these programs.

In addition to the used area and the unused area, the memory area of the main ROM 300b also includes an unused area (1A7BH to 1DFFH), a ROM comment area (1E00H to 1EFFH) in which arbitrary data such as program titles and versions are stored. ), an unused area (1F00H to 1FFFH), an unused area (2C00H to 2FBFH), and a program management area (2FC0H to 2FFFH) in which information necessary for main CPU 300a to execute a program is stored.

The memory area of the main RAM 300c is a use area (F000H to F1FFH) that is temporarily used when a program for controlling the progress of a game is being executed, and an area other than the use area. A non-use area (F210H to F228H) that is temporarily used when a program for performing a predetermined test or processing for displaying the performance display monitor 184 is executed is provided.

The area used in the main RAM 300c includes a work area (F000H to F12AH) that is temporarily used when a program for controlling the progress of the game is executed, an unused area (F12BH to F1D7H), A stack area (F1D8H to F1FFH) is provided for temporarily saving data during execution of a control program. Note that the used area may not include the unused area (F12BH to F1D7H).

In the non-use area of the main RAM 300c, there is a work area (F210H to F21FH), and a stack area (F220H to F228H) for temporarily saving data while these programs are being executed.

The memory area of the main RAM 300c also has unused areas (F200H to F20FH) and unused areas (F229H to F3FFH) in addition to the used area and the unused area.

In this way, the main ROM 300b and the main RAM 300c have a usable area for controlling the progress of the game, a processing for performing a test stipulated by gaming machine regulations, and a processing for controlling the display of the performance display monitor 184. are provided separately from the non-use area used for executing the

In the main RAM 300c, a 16-byte unused area (F200H to F20FH) is provided between the used area and the unused area. This unused area (F200H to F20FH) is set as a boundary area separating the used area and the unused area, and the boundary between the used area and the unused area becomes clear, and the program for controlling the progress of the game When the non-use area is used during execution, and when the program of the processing for performing the test stipulated by the gaming machine regulations and the processing for controlling the display of the performance display monitor 184 is being executed It prevents the used area from being used.

The unused area provided between the used area and the unused area should be at least 1 byte or more, preferably 4 bytes or more from the viewpoint of fraud prevention, and is set to 16 bytes or more. is more desirable. Also, although the unused area is prohibited from writing and reading data, it may be cleared at a predetermined timing from the viewpoint of fraud prevention.

Input/output units are assigned to the memory spaces of FE00h to FEFFh. Such an input/output unit will be described in detail later.

Next, a game in the gaming machine 100 of the simultaneous spinning reference example will be described together with various tables stored in the main ROM 300b.

As described above, in the gaming machine 100 of the simultaneous spinning reference example, two types of games, a special game and a normal game, progress in parallel. In the special game, the game progresses in one of the low-probability game state and the high-probability game state, and the normal game is in one of the non-time-saving game state, medium-time-saving game state, and time-saving game state. The game progresses.

The details of each game state will be described later, but the low-probability game state is a game state in which the probability of winning the right to execute the big win game in which the big winning opening is opened is set low, and is called a high-probability game state. 1 is a gaming state in which the probability of winning the right to execute a big win game is set high. In addition, the non-time-saving game state is a game state in which the movable piece 120b is difficult to open, and the game ball is difficult to enter the first variable start port 120B. It is a game state in which the movable piece 120b is more likely to be in the open state than in the state, and the game ball is more likely to enter the first variable starting port 120B. In addition, the time-saving game state is a game state in which the movable piece 120b is more likely to be in an open state than in the middle-time-saving game state, and the game ball is most likely to enter the first variable starting port 120B. In addition, in the time-saving game state, when the game balls are continuously shot toward the second game area 116b during the game, the game balls are set to decrease slightly or hardly decrease. .

As mentioned above, since the special game and the normal game progress in parallel, in the simultaneous turning reference example, the low probability game state or high probability game state, non-time-saving game state, medium-time-saving game state, time-saving game It becomes a game state in which any of the states is combined. Below, in order to facilitate understanding, the game state related to the special game, ie, the low probability game state and the high probability game state is called a special game state, the game state usually related to the game, ie, non-time-saving game state, medium The time-saving game state and the time-saving game state may be called normal game state. The initial state of the gaming machine 100 is set to a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state.

When the player operates the operation handle 112 to shoot the game ball into the game area 116, and the game ball flowing down the game area 116 enters the first start hole 120 or the second start hole 122, the player is asked to play the game. A lottery (hereinafter referred to as a "big role lottery") is held to decide whether or not to give a profit. In this big win lottery, when a big win is won, a big win game is executed in which the big win hole is opened and a game ball can enter the big win hole, and a game state after the big win game ends. is set to one of the above game states. Below, the major role lottery method will be described.

Although details will be described later, when a game ball enters the first start port 120 or the second start port 122, various random numbers related to the big role lottery (jackpot determination random number, winning pattern random number, reach group determination random number, reach mode determination random number, variation pattern random number) are acquired, and each random value is stored in the special figure reservation storage area of the main RAM 300c. Hereinafter, various random numbers stored in the special figure reservation storage area after the game ball enters the first start port 120 are collectively referred to as special 1 reservation, and the game ball enters the second start port 122. Various random numbers stored in the special figure reservation storage area are collectively called special 2 reservation.

The special figure reservation storage area of the main RAM 300c includes a first special figure reservation storage area and a second special figure reservation storage area. The first special figure reservation storage area and the second special figure reservation storage area each have four storage units (first to fourth storage units). Then, when the game ball enters the first start port 120, the special 1 reservation is stored in order from the first storage part of the first special figure reservation storage area, and when the game ball enters the second start port 122, special 2 reservation is stored in order from the first storage part of the second special figure reservation storage area.

For example, when the game ball enters the first start port 120, if the reservation is not stored in any of the first to fourth storage units of the first special figure reservation storage area, the first storage unit Store special 1 hold. Also, for example, in a state where special 1 suspension is stored in the first storage unit to the third storage unit, when the game ball enters the first start port 120, special 1 suspension is stored in the fourth storage unit Remember. Also, when the game ball enters the second start port 122, in the same manner as above, the special 2 reservation is stored in the first to fourth storage units of the second special figure reservation storage area. The special 2 hold is stored in the storage unit with the smallest number (ordinal number) that is not available.

However, the number of special 1 reservations (X1) and the number of special 2 reservations (X2) that can be stored in the first special figure reservation storage area and the second special figure reservation storage area are set to four respectively. Therefore, for example, when a game ball enters the first start port 120, if four special 1 reservations are already stored in the first special figure reservation storage area, to the first start port 120 A special 1 suspension is not newly stored by the entry of a game ball. Similarly, when the game ball enters the second start port 122, if four special 2 reservations are already stored in the second special figure reservation storage area, the game to the second start port 122 A special 2 hold is not newly memorized by the entry of a ball.

FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table according to the simultaneous turning reference example. When a game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122, one jackpot determination random number is obtained from within the range of 0-65535. Then, when the big win lottery is started, that is, according to the game state when judging the big win, the big win determination random number determination table is selected, and the selected jackpot determination random number determination table and the acquired jackpot determination random number are used. A lottery will be held.

In the low-probability gaming state, when the big win lottery is started for special 1 suspension and special 2 suspension, the low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table is referred to. Here, in the simultaneous turning reference example, six levels of setting values with different degrees of advantage are provided, and the low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table is provided for each setting value. During the game, the set value is set to one of six levels, and the low-probability jackpot decision random number judgment corresponding to the currently set set value (registered set value stored in the set value buffer) A lottery for major roles is conducted with reference to the table.

In the low-probability gaming state, when set value = 1 (registered set value = 1), refer to the low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table a shown in FIG. is done. According to this low probability jackpot determination random number determination table a, when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10218, it is determined as a jackpot, when the jackpot determination random number is 20001 to 38996, it is determined as a small hit, and others If it is a big hit decision random number, it is determined as a loss. Therefore, the big win probability in this case is about 1/300.6, and the small win probability is about 1/3.45.

In the low-probability gaming state, when the set value is set to 2 (registered set value = 2), the large role lottery with reference to the low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table b shown in FIG. 6(b) is done. According to this low probability jackpot determination random number determination table b, when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10225, it is determined as a jackpot, when the jackpot determination random number is 20001 to 38996, it is determined as a small hit, and others If it is a big hit decision random number, it is determined as a loss. Therefore, the big win probability in this case is about 1/291.2, and the small win probability is about 1/3.45.

In the low-probability gaming state, when the set value is set to 3 (registered set value = 3), the large role lottery with reference to the low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table c shown in FIG. 6(c) is done. According to this low probability jackpot determination random number determination table c, when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10232, it is determined as a jackpot, when the jackpot determination random number is 20001 to 38996, it is determined as a small hit, and others If it is a big hit decision random number, it is determined as a loss. Therefore, the big win probability in this case is about 1/282.4, and the small win probability is about 1/3.45.

In the low-probability gaming state, when set value = 4 (registered set value = 4), refer to the low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table d shown in FIG. is done. According to this low probability jackpot determination random number determination table d, it is determined as a jackpot when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10239, and when the jackpot determination random number is 20001 to 38996, it is determined as a small hit. If it is a big hit decision random number, it is determined as a loss. Therefore, the big win probability in this case is about 1/274.2, and the small win probability is about 1/3.45.

In the low-probability gaming state, when the setting value is set to 5 (registered setting value=5), the large role lottery with reference to the low-probability jackpot decision random number determination table e shown in FIG. 6(e) is done. According to this low probability jackpot determination random number determination table e, when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10246, it is determined as a jackpot, when the jackpot determination random number is 20001 to 38996, it is determined as a small hit, and others If it is a big hit decision random number, it is determined as a loss. Therefore, the big win probability in this case is about 1/266.4, and the small win probability is about 1/3.45.

In the low-probability gaming state, when set value = 6 (registered set value = 6), refer to the low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table f shown in FIG. is done. According to this low probability jackpot determination random number determination table f, when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10253, it is determined as a jackpot, when the jackpot determination random number is 20001 to 38996, it is determined as a small hit, and others If it is a big hit decision random number, it is determined as a loss. Therefore, the big win probability in this case is about 1/259.0, and the small win probability is about 1/3.45.

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a high-probability jackpot determination random number determination table according to the simultaneous turning reference example. In the high-probability gaming state, when the big win lottery is started for special 1 suspension and special 2 suspension, the high-probability jackpot determination random number determination table is referred to. The high-probability jackpot determination random number determination table is also provided for each set value in the same manner as the low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table.

In the high-probability gaming state, when the setting value is set to 1 (registered setting value=1), the large role lottery is performed with reference to the high-probability jackpot determination random number determination table a shown in FIG. 7(a). is done. According to this high probability jackpot determination random number determination table a, when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10620, it is determined as a jackpot, when the jackpot determination random number is 20001 to 38996, it is determined as a small hit, and others If it is a big hit decision random number, it is determined as a loss. Therefore, the big win probability in this case is about 1/105.7, and the small win probability is about 1/3.45.

Similarly, in the high probability gaming state, if the setting value = 2 ~ 6 is set (registration setting value = 2 ~ 6), the high probability jackpot shown in Figure 7 (b) ~ (f) A major winning lottery is performed with reference to the decision random number determination tables b to f. According to these high-probability jackpot determination random number determination tables b to f, when the jackpot determination random number is the value shown in the drawing, it is determined as a jackpot. Therefore, when the set value is 2 to 6, the big win probability is about 1/102.4 to 1/91.0, and the small win probability is about 1/3.45.

As described above, the major role lottery is performed according to the registered setting values. At this time, the probability of winning a big win differs depending on the registered set value, and it is easier to win a big win when the registered set value is larger than when the registered set value is small. Here, even if the registered set values are different, the odds of winning the small win are not changed, but the odds of winning the small win may be changed for each registered set value. Also, the small win is not essential, and only one of the big win and the loss may be determined in the big win lottery.

Also, here, the probability of winning the jackpot in both the low-probability gaming state and the high-probability gaming state is different according to the registered set value. Only the probability of winning may differ according to the registered set value.

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining a winning symbol random number determination table and a small winning symbol random number determination table according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. When a game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122, one winning symbol random number is obtained from within the range of 0-99. Then, when the determination result of "big hit" is derived by the big win lottery, the type of special symbol is determined by the acquired winning symbol random number and the winning symbol random number determination table. At this time, when the "big win" is won by the special 1 reservation, as shown in FIG. 8(a), the special 1 winning symbol random number determination table a is selected, and the "big win" is won by the special 2 reservation. In this case, as shown in FIG. 8(b), the winning symbol random number determination table b for special 2 is selected, and when the "small winning" is won by holding the special 1, as shown in FIG. 8(c). Then, the special 1 small winning symbol random number determination table a is selected, and when the "small winning" is won by the special 2 reservation, as shown in FIG. b is selected. In the following, the special pattern determined by the winning pattern random number, that is, the special pattern determined when the judgment result of the big hit is obtained is called the jackpot pattern, and it is decided when the judgment result of the small hit is obtained. A special symbol is called a small winning symbol, and a special symbol determined when a loss determination result is obtained is called a losing symbol.

According to the special 1 per symbol random number determination table a shown in FIG. 8(a) and the special 2 per symbol random number determination table b shown in FIG. 8(b), according to the value of the acquired per symbol random number, As shown in the figure, jackpot symbols (special symbols A to J) are determined as special symbols. Also, according to the special 1 small per symbol random number determination table a shown in FIG. 8 (c) and the special 2 small per symbol random number determination table b shown in FIG. 8 (d), the value of the acquired per symbol random number Accordingly, as shown in the figure, small winning symbols (special symbols Z1 to Z6) are determined as special symbols.

It should be noted that, when the result of the lottery lottery is "losing", when the lottery result is derived by special 1 reservation, the special symbol X is determined as a losing pattern without performing a lottery, and the lottery result is the special 2 When derived by holding, the special symbol Y is determined as a losing symbol without lottery. That is, the winning symbol random number determination table is referred to only when the big win lottery result is "big hit", and is not referred to when the big win lottery result is "loss" or "minor win". Also, the small win symbol random number determination table is referred only when the big win lottery result is "small win", and is not referred to when the big win lottery result is "big win" or "losing". In addition, the special symbols Z1 to Z6, which are the small winning symbols, are collectively referred to simply as the special symbol Z.

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining a reach group determination random number determination table according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. A plurality of reach group determination random number determination tables are provided, and a preset table is selected according to the type of reservation, the number of reservations, the game state, and the like. When a game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122, one reach group determination random number is obtained from within the range of 0-10006. As described above, when the key role lottery result is derived, a process of determining a variable effect pattern for reporting the key role lottery result is performed. In the simultaneous spinning reference example, when the big role lottery result is "losing", the group type is first determined by the reach group determination random number and the reach group determination random number determination table in determining the variable performance pattern.

For example, when the game state is set to the normal state, which will be described later in detail, and the result of the "losing" major role lottery is derived based on the special 1 suspension, the special 1 suspension is held when the major role lottery is performed. If the number (hereinafter simply referred to as "retained number") is 0, the reach group determination random number determination table 1 is selected as shown in FIG. 9(a). Similarly, when the normal state is set, if the result of the "losing" big role lottery is derived based on the special 1 reservation, if the number of reservations when performing the big lottery lottery is 1 to 2, As shown in FIG. 9(b), the reach group determination random number determination table 2 is selected, and if the number of reservations is 3, as shown in FIG. 9(c), the reach group determination random number determination table 3 is selected. be. In addition, in FIG. 9, the group x described in the group type column indicates an arbitrary group number. Therefore, various group numbers are determined as group types according to the reach group determination random number obtained and the type of the reach group determination random number determination table to be referred to.

It should be noted that here, in the normal state, based on the Special 1 reservation, the reach group determination random number determination table that is referred to when the "losing" key role lottery result is derived has been described, but the main ROM 300b also stores A large number of reach group determination random number determination tables are stored.

In addition, when the big role lottery result is "big win" or "small win", the group type is not determined when determining the variation production pattern. That is, the reach group determination random number determination table is referred only when the big win lottery result is "losing", and is not referred to when the big win lottery result is "big hit" or "minor win".

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a reach mode determination random number determination table according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This reach mode determination random number determination table is the reach mode determination random number determination table at the time of losing selected when the big role lottery result is "losing", and the big win selected when the big role lottery result is "big hit" It is roughly divided into a time reach mode determination random number determination table and a small win time reach mode determination random number determination table selected when the big winning lottery result is "small win". In addition, the reach mode determination random number determination table at the time of losing is provided for each group type determined as described above, and the reach mode determination random number determination table at the time of the big hit and the reach mode determination random number determination table at the time of the small hit are the game state , are provided for each hold type.

In addition, each ready-to-win mode decision random number determination table is provided for each game state and type of symbol. Here, FIG. 10A shows an example of the reach mode determination random number determination table for group x that is referred to in a predetermined game state and symbol type, and an example of the reach mode determination random number determination table for special 1 jackpot Shown in FIG. 10 (b), an example of a reach mode determination random number determination table for special 2 jackpot is shown in FIG. 10 (c), an example of a reach mode determination random number determination table for special 1 small hit is FIG. , and an example of the reach mode determination random number determination table for small hits for special 2 is shown in FIG. 10(e).

When a game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122, one reach mode determination random number is obtained from within the range of 0-250. Then, when the result of the big role lottery is "losing", as shown in FIG. A determination table is selected, and a variation mode number is determined based on the selected reach mode determination random number determination table at loss and the reach mode determination random number. In addition, when the result of the big win lottery is "jackpot", as shown in FIGS. A big hit reach mode determination random number determination table is selected, and a variation mode number is determined based on the selected big hit reach mode determination random number determination table and reach mode determination random number.

Furthermore, when the result of the big win lottery is "small win", as shown in FIGS. A small hit reach mode determination random number determination table corresponding to is selected, and a variation mode number is determined based on the selected small hit reach mode determination random number determination table and reach mode determination random number.

Further, in each reach mode determination random number determination table, the reach mode determination random number is associated with a variation mode number and a variation pattern random number determination table described later. A random number decision table is determined. In FIG. 10, the table x described in the column of variation pattern random number determination table indicates an arbitrary table number. Therefore, the variation mode number and the table number of the variation pattern random number determination table are determined according to the acquired reach group determination random number and the type of the reach mode determination random number determination table to be referred to. Further, in the simultaneous turning reference example, the variation mode number and the variation pattern number, which will be described later, are set in hexadecimal. In the following description, hexadecimal numbers are indicated by "H", but ◯◯H in FIGS. 10 to 12 indicates arbitrary values represented by hexadecimal numbers.

As described above, when the winning lottery result is "lost", first, the group type is determined by the reach group determination random number determination table shown in FIG. 9 and the reach group determination random number. Then, according to the determined group type and gaming state, the variation mode number and the variation pattern random number determination table are determined by the reach mode determination random number determination table and the reach mode determination random number at the time of losing shown in FIG. 10(a).

On the other hand, if the big win lottery result is "big win" or "small win", the determined big win pattern or small win pattern (type of special pattern), the game state at the time of winning the big win or small win, etc. With reference to the corresponding reach mode determination random number determination table shown in FIG. 10, the reach mode determination random number is used to determine the variation mode number and the variation pattern random number determination table.

FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a fluctuation pattern random number determination table according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. Here, a fluctuation pattern random number determination table x of a predetermined table number x is shown, but many other fluctuation pattern random number determination tables are provided for each table number.

When a game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122, one variation pattern random number is obtained from within the range of 0-238. Then, based on the fluctuation pattern random number determination table determined at the same time as the fluctuation mode number and the obtained fluctuation pattern random number, the fluctuation pattern number is determined as shown in the figure.

Thus, when the big role lottery is performed, the variation mode number and the variation pattern number are determined according to the big role lottery result, the determined symbol type, the game state, the number of reservations, the type of reservation, and the like. These variable mode number and variable pattern number specify the variable effect pattern, and each of them is associated with the mode and time of the variable effect.

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining a variable time determination table according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. As described above, when the variable mode number is determined, variable time 1 is determined according to the variable time 1 determination table shown in FIG. 12(a). According to this variable time 1 determination table, variable time 1 is associated with each variable mode number, and the corresponding variable time 1 is determined according to the determined variable mode number.

Further, as described above, when the variation pattern number is determined, the variation time 2 is determined according to the variation time 2 determination table shown in FIG. 12(b). According to this variation time 2 determination table, variation time 2 is associated with each variation pattern number, and the corresponding variation time 2 is determined according to the determined variation pattern number. The total time of the variable times 1 and 2 determined in this way is the time of the variable effect for informing the result of the big role lottery, that is, the variable time. This fluctuation time is the time until the determined special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 160 or the second special symbol display device 162 .

Although it will be described later in detail, the special design is determined based on the special 1 reservation, and when the variation mode number and the variation pattern number, that is, the variation time are determined, the first special design display over the determined variation time The variable display of the symbol is performed in the device 160, and when the variable time elapses, the determined special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 160. - 特許庁In addition, when the special symbol is determined based on the special 2 hold and the variation pattern number, that is, the variation time is determined, the variation display of the symbol is performed on the second special symbol display 162 over the determined variation time. After the variation time has elapsed, the determined special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 162 . At this time, the losing pattern is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display device 160, so that the losing is determined as a result of the major role lottery, and the major role lottery based on the next special 1 reserve can be executed, and the losing symbol is the second. By stop-displaying on the special symbol display device 162, a loss is determined as a result of the major role lottery, and the major role lottery based on the next special 2 reservation can be executed. On the other hand, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed on the first special pattern display device 160 or the second special pattern display device 162, the jackpot is determined as a result of the big win lottery, the big win game is executed, and the small win pattern is the first special. When the symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162 is stop-displayed, a small win is determined as a result of the big win lottery, and a small win game is executed.

In this way, the variable time defines the time for the variable display of the symbols on the first special symbol display device 160 or the second special symbol display device 162, in other words, the time until the result of the major role lottery is determined. Become.

When the variation mode number is determined as described above, a variation mode command corresponding to the determined variation mode number is transmitted to the sub control board 330, and when the variation pattern number is determined, the determined variation A variation pattern command corresponding to the pattern number is transmitted to the sub control board 330 . In the sub control board 330, mainly the first half of the variable performance is determined based on the received variable mode command, and the second half of the variable performance is mainly determined based on the received variable pattern command. However, the details will be described later. In the following description, the variation mode number and variation pattern number may be collectively referred to as variation information, and the variation mode command and variation pattern command may be collectively referred to as variation command.

FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the game state and variation time according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. As described above, the special game state and the normal game state are combined into one game state, and the progress of the game is controlled according to the game state being set. As already explained, the special game state is provided in two types, a low-probability game state and a high-probability game state, in which the odds of winning a jackpot are different. In addition, the normal game state is provided with three types: a non-time-saving game state, a medium-time-saving game state, and a time-saving game state, in which the easiness (ball-entering frequency) of the game ball to the first variable start port 120B is different from each other. It is

Here, in the normal game, the ease of entry of the game ball into the first variable starter opening 120B is determined by three factors: winning probability, fluctuation time, and opening time. Although details will be described later, in the normal game, when the game ball passes through the gate 124 or the game ball enters the normal pattern operation port 125, normal pattern suspension is stored. Then, based on the stored general pattern reservation, a general pattern lottery for determining whether or not to open the movable piece 120b is performed. The result of this normal drawing lottery is determined when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed. When winning is determined as a result of the normal drawing lottery, the movable piece 120b is released. At this time, the winning probability in the normal drawing lottery, the fluctuation time, and the opening time when opening the movable piece 120b are set for each normal game state.

In the simultaneous spinning reference example, as shown in FIG. 13(a), six types of game states are provided by combining the special game state and the normal game state. The initial state of the gaming machine 100 is a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state. In addition, in the non-time-saving game state, the winning probability in the normal drawing lottery is low, the fluctuation time is long, and the opening time of the movable piece 120b is short. In the simultaneous turning reference example, the game state in which the low-probability game state and the non-time-saving game state are combined is called a normal state.

Also, in the simultaneous turning reference example, it may be set to a high probability game state and a non-time-saving game state, and the game state in which both are combined is called the most dominant state. This highest priority state has the highest degree of advantage among the six game states, and if the game balls are properly shot, the number of game balls gradually increases during the game even if the jackpot is not won. It is set to go.

Also, in the simultaneous turning reference example, it may be set to a low probability game state and a time saving game state. In addition, in the time-saving game state, the winning probability in the normal drawing lottery is high, the fluctuation time is short, and the opening time of the movable piece 120b is long. Below, the game state in which the low-probability game state and the time-saving game state are combined is called a low-probability time-saving state.

Also, in the simultaneous turning reference example, it may be set to a high probability game state and a time saving game state. Below, the game state in which the high probability game state and the time saving game state are combined is called a high probability time saving state or a high probability omen state. In addition, the high-probability time saving state and the high-probability omen state will be described later in detail.

In addition, in the simultaneous turning reference example, it may be set to a high probability game state and a medium time reduction game state. In addition, in the medium time-saving game state, the winning probability in the normal drawing lottery is higher than the non-time-saving game state and lower than the time-saving game state, the fluctuation time is short, and the opening time of the movable piece 120b is long. This game state can be set when an unforeseen situation occurs, such as when the game ball is not properly shot. In the following, the game state in which the high probability game state and the medium time reduction game state are combined is called a penalty state.

Incidentally, in the sub-control board 330, an effect mode corresponding to the game state set in the main control board 300 is set. The effect mode defines the background image, BGM, etc. displayed on the main effect display section 200a, and the content of the effect differs for each effect mode. That is, the player can identify the current game state by the effect mode.

As described above, in the simultaneous spinning reference example, six game states are provided. Then, as described above, the variation mode number and variation pattern number, that is, the variation time is determined according to the game state, the reservation type, the number of variations in the game state, and the type of symbol when the big role lottery is performed. be.

Here, in the gaming machine 100, a substantial variation target is set for each gaming state. The subject of substantial variation originally indicates the type of suspension for which the big win lottery should be performed, and either special 1 suspension or special 2 suspension is set as the substantial variation subject for each gaming state. In the normal state, Special 1 hold is set as a substantial fluctuation target. Moreover, in the normal state, since the normal game state is the non-time-saving game state, the first variable starter port 120B is hardly opened. Therefore, in the normal state, the player needs to launch the game ball toward the first game area 116a in order to enter the game ball into the first fixed starting port 120A.

In the normal state, when the big winning lottery is performed by the special 1 reservation which is the object of substantial fluctuation, and the losing pattern or the small winning pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is determined within the range of 3 to 100 seconds. Also, in the normal state, when the big win lottery is performed by the special 1 reservation and the big winning pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is determined within the range of 40 to 100 seconds.

On the other hand, in the normal state, when the major role lottery is performed by the special 2 reserve which is not subject to actual variation, the variation time is always determined to be 10 minutes regardless of the determined symbol type. In this way, by setting the variable time to a long time such as 10 minutes, in the normal state, even if the player enters the game ball into the second start port 122, the major role lottery based on the special 2 reservation Very few opportunities to do so.

Specifically, the second starter opening 122 is provided in the second game area 116b, and the second starter opening 122 is always configured as a fixed starter opening into which game balls can enter. Furthermore, due to the playability of the gaming machine 100, the second starting hole 122 is arranged at a position where a game ball enters more easily than the first starting hole 120.例文帳に追加Therefore, if the fluctuation time for the special 2 hold is shortened in the normal state, the player will be given more chances than necessary for the winning lottery. Therefore, in accordance with the original playability in the normal state, the variation time is set to a long time such as 10 minutes in order to appropriately shoot the game ball toward the first game area 116a.

In the highest priority state, Special 2 hold is set as a substantial fluctuation target. Therefore, in the highest priority state, the player needs to launch the game ball toward the second game area 116b in order to enter the game ball into the second starting hole 122.例文帳に追加In the highest priority state, when a major role lottery is performed by special 1 reservation which is not subject to actual variation, the variation time is always determined to be 10 seconds regardless of the determined symbol type. In addition, in the case where the major role lottery is performed by special 1 suspension that is not subject to substantial fluctuation in the most dominant state, compared to the case where the major role lottery is performed by special 2 suspension that is not subject to substantial fluctuation in the normal state, the game performance is improved. little impact. Therefore, in the highest priority state, the fluctuation time when the major role lottery is performed by the special 1 reservation that is not subject to real fluctuation is set as short as 10 seconds.

In the highest priority state, a large winning lottery is performed by the special 2 reservation which is the object of substantial fluctuation, and when the losing pattern or the small winning pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is determined within the range of 1 to 3 seconds. Also, in the highest priority state, when the big winning lottery is performed by special 2 reservation and the big winning pattern is determined, the variation time is determined within the range of 3 seconds to 10 seconds.

In both the low probability short working hours state and the high certainty short working hours state, special 1 suspension is set as a real fluctuation target. In addition, in the low probability time saving state and the high probability time saving state, the normal game state is set to the time saving game state, and the first variable starting port 120B is frequently controlled to the open state. Therefore, in these two game states, the player needs to shoot the game ball toward the second game area 116b in order to enter the game ball into the first variable starting port 120B. In these two game states, the same variation pattern random number determination table is selected, but these two game states are common in that the normal game state is the time-saving game state. In other words, when the normal game state is the time-saving game state, the big role lottery is performed by the special 1 reservation that is the actual fluctuation target, and when the losing pattern or the small winning pattern is determined, the fluctuation time of 1 second is always determined. be. In addition, in the case of the low-probability short working hours state and the high-probable short working hours state, when the big winning lottery is performed by the special 1 reservation and the big winning pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is always set to 30 seconds.

In the highly probable omen state, the special 1 hold is set as a substantial fluctuation target. Further, in the high-probability omen state, the normal game state is set to the time-saving game state, and the first variable starting port 120B is frequently controlled to the open state. Therefore, in the high-probability omen state, the player needs to launch the game ball toward the second game area 116b in order to enter the game ball into the first variable starting port 120B. In the high-probability omen state, when a large role lottery is performed by special 1 reservation which is a real fluctuation object, and a losing pattern or a small winning pattern is determined, a fluctuation time is determined within the range of 3 seconds to 10 seconds. In addition, in the high-probability omen state, when the big winning lottery is performed by special 1 reservation and the big winning pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is always determined to be 30 seconds.

On the other hand, when the low-probability short-time state, high-probability short-time state and high-probability omen state, that is, when the normal game state is the time-saving game state, when the big role lottery is performed by the special 2 hold that is not subject to real fluctuation, Regardless of the determined symbol type, the variable time is always determined to be 10 minutes.

In the penalty state, special 1 suspension is set as a substantial fluctuation target. In addition, in the penalty state, the normal game state is set to the medium time-saving game state, and the first variable starting port 120B is controlled to the open state at a constant frequency. Therefore, in the penalty state, the player needs to shoot the game ball toward the second game area 116b in order to enter the game ball into the first variable starting port 120B. In the penalty state, a large winning lottery is performed by holding special 1, which is the object of substantial fluctuation, and when a losing pattern or a small winning pattern is determined, a fluctuation time is determined within the range of 3 to 100 seconds. In addition, in the penalty state, when the big winning lottery is performed by special 1 suspension and the big winning pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is determined within the range of 40 to 100 seconds.

On the other hand, in the penalty state, when the big role lottery is performed by the special 2 reserve which is not subject to actual fluctuation, the fluctuation time is always determined to be 10 minutes regardless of the determined symbol type.

As described above, a substantial variation target is set for each game state, and when a major role lottery based on a reservation type as a substantial variation target is performed, the maximum variation time is 100 seconds. On the other hand, when the big role lottery based on the reservation type which is not subject to actual variation is performed, the variation time is approximately 10 minutes, so that the game contrary to the original game characteristics is not performed.

In addition, in the simultaneous turning reference example, the average of the fluctuation time of the high-probability short-time state is shorter than the average of the fluctuation time of the high-probability omen state, but the average of the fluctuation time of the high-probability short-time state is highly probable It may be longer than the average of the fluctuation time of the precursor state. That is, the average of the fluctuation time of the high probability short working hours state and the average of the fluctuation time of the high probability precursor state may be different.

FIG. 14 is the first diagram for explaining the special electric accessory operating ramset table according to the simultaneous rotation reference example, and FIG. 15 is the first diagram for explaining the special electric accessory operating ramset table according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. 2. FIG. In addition, the special electric role product operating ram set table stores various data for controlling the big role game or the small winning game, and the special electric role product operating ram set By referring to the table, the energization of the first big winning opening solenoid 126c or the second big winning opening solenoid 128c is controlled. In fact, a plurality of special electric accessory actuating ramset tables are provided for each type of special symbols (both jackpot symbols and small winning symbols), and depending on the type of special symbol determined, the corresponding table plays a major role. Although it is set at the start of a game or a small winning game, here, for convenience of explanation, control data of special symbols are shown for each type of symbol.

As shown in FIG. 14, the big winning game is composed of a plurality of round games in which the big winning opening is opened and closed a predetermined number of times, and the small winning game is executed only once. According to this special electric role product operation ram set table, the opening time (waiting time until the first round game is started), the maximum number of times of special electric role product operation (executed during one big role game or small winning game number of round games played), number of times of opening and closing of special electric accessories (number of times the large winning opening is opened in one round), solenoid energization time (first large winning opening solenoid 126c or second Energizing time of the large winning opening solenoid 128c, that is, opening time of one large winning opening), specified number (maximum number of possible winnings to the large winning opening in one round game), effective time of closing the large winning opening (round Closing time of the big winning opening between games, that is, interval time), ending time (waiting time from the end of the last round game to the restart of the normal special game (fluctuation display of symbols described later)) However, as control data, it is stored in advance as shown in the figure for each type of special symbol.

Incidentally, when a jackpot is won by special 1 reservation and special symbols A, B, and D are determined as jackpot symbols, a big win game consisting of four round games is executed. In this big win game, the first big winning opening 126 is opened only once in each of the first to fourth round games. In each round game, the first big prize opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds. The first prize winning opening 126 is closed and one round game ends.

Further, when a jackpot is won by special 1 reservation and special symbols C and E are determined as jackpot symbols, a big win game consisting of 10 round games is executed. In these big win games, the first big winning opening 126 is opened only once in each of the 1st to 10th round games. In each round game, the first big prize opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds. The first prize winning opening 126 is closed and one round game ends.

In addition, when a small winning is won by special 1 reservation and special symbols Z1 to Z3 are determined as small winning symbols, a small winning game composed of one round game is executed. In this small winning game, the second big winning opening 128 is opened once for 0.1 seconds in one round game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 15, when a jackpot is won by special 2 reservation and special patterns F, G, and I are determined as jackpot patterns, a big win game consisting of four round games is executed. be. In this big win game, the first big winning opening 126 is opened only once in each of the first to fourth round games. In each round game, the first big prize opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds. The first prize winning opening 126 is closed and one round game ends.

In addition, when a jackpot is won by special 2 reservation and special patterns H and J are determined as jackpot patterns, a big win game consisting of 10 round games is executed. In this big win game, the first big winning opening 126 is opened only once in each of the 1st to 10th round games. In each round game, the first big prize opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds. The first prize winning opening 126 is closed and one round game ends.

Further, even when a small winning is won by special 2 reservation and special symbols Z4 to Z6 are determined as small winning symbols, a small winning game consisting of one round game is executed. Here, in the small winning game when the special symbol Z4 is determined as the small winning symbol, the second big winning opening 128 is opened twice for 0.1 seconds in one round game. It should be noted that the interval time during the round, which is the pause time between opening the second big winning hole 128 twice, is set to 1.78 seconds. Since the game ball is shot at an interval of 0.6 seconds at the shortest, considering the opening time of the second big winning hole 128 and the shooting interval of the game ball, the game ball will be the second big winning during this small winning game. The probability of hitting the ball in the mouth 128 is low.

However, in the simultaneous turning reference example, the structure is such that game balls tend to stay on the movable piece 128b that maintains the second big winning hole 128 in the closed state, and the movable piece 128b is moved to the open state, so that the movable piece 128b can move. A game ball staying on the piece 128b is guided into the second big winning hole 128. - 特許庁Therefore, by opening the second big winning hole 128 twice for 0.1 seconds, 2 to 3 game balls enter the second big winning hole 128 on average.

Further, in the small winning game when the special symbol Z5 is determined as the small winning symbol, the second big winning opening 128 is opened 0.1 seconds×3 times in one round game. In this case, the in-round interval time is set to 0.84 seconds. In this small winning game, 3 to 4 game balls enter the second big winning hole 128 on average.

Furthermore, in the small winning game when the special symbol Z6 is determined as the small winning symbol, the second big winning opening 128 is opened 0.1 seconds×12 times in one round game. In this case, the in-round interval time is set to 0.84 seconds. In this small winning game, by continuing to shoot game balls toward the second game area 116b, it is almost certain that a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls can enter the second big winning hole 128. can.

In the design stage of the gaming machine 100, it is necessary to strictly manage and adjust the shot prize ball ratio, which is the ratio between the number of game balls shot and the number of prize balls paid out. Therefore, in the simultaneous turning reference example, a special symbol Z4 in which the opening of 0.1 seconds is performed twice in the small winning game, and a special symbol Z5 in which the opening of 0.1 seconds is performed three times in the small winning game are provided, Only by changing these selection ratios, the shot prize ball ratio can be easily adjusted and changed.

FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining a game state setting table for setting the game state after the end of the big win game according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. In the simultaneous spinning reference example, when the big win game is executed, the game state setting table is referred to according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the type of reservation, and the type of special pattern (jackpot pattern), and after the big win game ends Set the game state of

When the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state or the penalty state, when the jackpot is won by holding special 1 which is the object of substantial variation, the game state after the big win game is set according to the type of the jackpot pattern. Specifically, when the special symbol A is determined as the jackpot symbol, it is set to a low-probability time-saving state (the special game state is a low-probability game state, and the normal game state is a time-saving game state). At this time, the number of continuation times of the time saving game state (hereinafter referred to as "time saving number of times") is set to 100 times. This means that the time-saving gaming state continues until the big win lottery is performed 100 times. However, the number of times of time saving described above indicates the maximum number of times of continuation in the time saving game state of 1, and if the jackpot is won before the number of times of continuation is reached, the game state is set again. It will happen. Therefore, when the time-saving game state is set after the end of the big role game, when the lottery result other than the big win is derived 100 times without deriving the jackpot lottery result in the time-saving game state, the non-time-saving game state The game state is changed to (normal state).

In addition, when the special symbols B and D are determined as the jackpot symbols, a high-probability time-saving state (the special game state is a high-probability game state, and the normal game state is a time-saving game state) is set. At this time, "next time" is set as the high-probability number of times, and the high-probability game state continues until the next big win is won. In addition, "next time" is set as the number of time-saving games, and the time-saving game state continues until the next big win is won. Therefore, when the special symbols B and D are determined, the high-probability time-saving state continues until the next big win is won after the big win game.

In addition, when the special symbols C and E are determined as the jackpot symbols, the high probability precursor state (the special game state is the high probability game state, and the normal game state is the time saving game state) is set. At this time, "next time" is set as the high probability number of times, and the time saving number of times is set to 100 times. When the special symbols C and E are determined, the high-probability game state continues until the next big win is won, while the time-saving game state ends after 100 times. Therefore, when the special symbols C and E are determined, after the big win game, the game state shifts to the highest priority state when the result of the big win lottery is derived 100 times.

In addition, when the game state at the time of winning the big win is the normal state or the penalty state, if the big win is won by holding special 2 which is not subject to real variation, the game state after the big win game is set as follows. That is, when the special symbol F is determined as the jackpot symbol, it is set to the normal state (the special game state is the low probability game state, and the normal game state is the non-time-saving game state). Also, when the special symbols G to J are determined as the jackpot symbols, the penalty state is set (the special game state is the high-probability game state, and the normal game state is the medium-short-time game state). At this time, both the high-probability number of times and the time-saving number of times are set to "next time".

In addition, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the highest priority state, if the jackpot is won by special 1 reservation, which is not subject to real variation, the game state after the big win game is set as follows. That is, when the special symbol A is determined as the jackpot symbol, it is set to a low-probability time-saving state (the special game state is a low-probability game state, and the normal game state is a time-saving game state). At this time, the number of times of time saving is set to 100 times. Further, when the special symbols B to E are determined as the jackpot symbols, the game state after the big win game is set in the same manner as the normal state and the penalty state.

On the other hand, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the highest priority state, when the jackpot is won by holding special 2, which is the object of substantial variation, the game state after the big win game is set as follows. That is, when the special symbol F is determined as the jackpot symbol, it is set to a low-probability time-saving state (the special game state is a low-probability game state, and the normal game state is a time-saving game state). At this time, the number of times of time saving is set to 100 times. Further, when the special symbols G and I are determined as the jackpot symbols, the high-probability time-saving state (the special game state is the high-probability game state, and the normal game state is the time-saving game state) is set. At this time, the high probability number of times and the time saving number of times are set to "next time".

In addition, when the special symbols H and J are determined as the jackpot symbols, the high probability precursor state (the special game state is the high probability game state, and the normal game state is the time saving game state) is set. At this time, the high probability number of times is set to "next time", and the time saving number of times is set to 100 times.

Also, if the game state at the time of jackpot winning is a low-probability short-time state, high-probability short-time state, high-probability omen state, that is, if the normal game state is a short-time game state, the game state after the big win game is the normal state and penalty conditions.

FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining a winning determination random number determination table according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. When the game ball flowing down the game area 116 passes through the gate 124 or enters the normal figure operation opening 125, it is associated whether or not the movable piece 120b of the first variable starting opening 120B is energized and controlled. Normal design determination processing (hereinafter referred to as "normal drawing lottery") is performed.

In addition, although it will be described in detail later, when the game ball passes through the gate 124 or enters the normal pattern operation port 125, one hit determination random number is acquired from within the range of 0 to 99, and this random Numerical values are stored up to four in the general map reservation storage area of the main RAM 300c. That is, the general pattern reservation storage area has four storage units for saving the hit determination random numbers. Therefore, in the state in which the determined random number is stored in all four storage units of the normal pattern reservation storage area, the game ball passes through the gate 124 or enters the normal pattern operation port 125, the game No hit decision random numbers are stored based on ball passage. In the following, the game ball passes through the gate 124 or the game ball enters the normal pattern operation port 125 and the hit decision random number stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area is called normal pattern reservation.

When the normal game state is a non-time-saving game state, when the normal drawing lottery is started, as shown in FIG. According to this non-time-saving gaming state hit determination random number determination table, when the hit determination random number is 0, the hit design is determined as the type of normal design, and when the hit determination random number is 1 to 99, A lost pattern is determined as the type of the normal pattern. Therefore, the probability that winning symbols are determined in the non-time-saving gaming state, that is, the winning probability is 1/100. Although details will be described later, when the winning pattern is determined in this normal pattern lottery, the movable piece 120b of the first variable starting port 120B is controlled to the open state, and when the losing pattern is determined, the first variable starting The movable piece 120b of the mouth 120B is kept closed.

In addition, when starting the normal drawing lottery in the medium time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. According to this middle-time-saving gaming state hit determination random number determination table, when the hit determination random number is 0 to 49, the hit design is determined as the normal design type, and when the hit determination random number is 50 to 99 Then, a lost symbol is determined as the type of the normal symbol. Therefore, the probability that winning symbols are determined in the middle-time-saving gaming state, that is, the winning probability is 50/100.

In addition, when starting the normal figure lottery in the time saving game state, as shown in FIG. According to this time-saving gaming state hit determination random number determination table, when the hit determination random number is 0 to 98, the hit design is determined as the type of normal design, and when the hit determination random number is 99, normal A lost pattern is determined as the type of the pattern. Therefore, the probability that winning symbols are determined in the time-saving gaming state, that is, the winning probability is 99/100.

FIG. 18(a) is a diagram for explaining a normal symbol fluctuation time data table according to the simultaneous rotation reference example, and FIG. 18(b) is a diagram for explaining an opening/closing control pattern table according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. As described above, when the general pattern lottery is performed, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is determined. The normal symbol variation time data table is referred to when determining the normal symbol variation time when a winning symbol or a losing symbol is determined by a normal symbol lottery. According to this normal symbol variation time data table, when the game state is set to the non-time-saving game state and the medium-time-saving game state, the variation time is determined to be 10 seconds, and the game state is set to the time-saving game state. If so, the variation time is determined to be 1 second. When the variable time is determined in this way, the normal symbol display 168 is variable-displayed (blinking-displayed) over the determined time. Then, when a winning symbol is determined, the normal symbol display 168 is lit, and when a losing symbol is determined, the normal symbol display 168 is extinguished.

Then, when the winning pattern is determined by the normal pattern lottery and the normal pattern display 168 is lit, the movable piece 120b of the first variable starting port 120B is controlled to open and close as shown in FIG. 18(b). The energization is controlled by referring to the pattern table. Actually, the opening/closing control pattern table is provided for each game state, and the corresponding table is set at the start of energization of the normal electric accessory solenoid 120c according to the game state when the normal symbol is determined. .

When the winning pattern is determined, as shown in FIG. 18(b), the opening/closing of the first variable starting port 120B is controlled with reference to the opening/closing control pattern table. According to this opening/closing control pattern table, the time before normal electric opening (waiting time until the opening of the first variable starting port 120B is started), the maximum number of opening/closing switching times of normal electric accessories (opening of the first variable starting port 120B number of times), solenoid energization time (energization time of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 120c for each number of times the first variable starter opening 120B is opened, that is, opening time of the first variable starter 120B once), specified number (first variable The maximum number of winnings to the first variable starting port 120B while the starting port 120B is fully open), the normal power closing effective time (the closing time between each opening of the first variable starting port 120B, that is, the rest time), the normal power Effective state time (waiting time from the end of the last opening of the first variable start port 120B), normal electric end wait time (after the normal electric effective state time elapses, waiting until the fluctuation display of the normal symbol described later is resumed time) is stored in advance as shown in the figure for each game state as the control data for the first variable start port 120B.

In this way, by setting the winning probability, variation time, and release time of normal symbols, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 1st variable starting port 120B, 2nd starting port 122, normal pattern operation port 125 and the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out to the player by entering the game ball in the normal pattern operation port 125 and the big winning port) is the number of shots : number of prize balls = 100:20, number of shots in medium time-saving game state: number of prizes = 100:40, number of shots in time-saving game state: number of prize balls = 100:99.

The open/close condition of the first variable starting port 120B defines three elements: winning probability of normal symbols, variable display time of normal symbols, and opening time of the first variable starting port 120B. In other words, by combining the three elements of the winning probability of normal symbols, the time of variable display of normal symbols, and the opening time of the first variable start port 120B, in each of the non-time-saving game state, medium-time-saving game state, and time-saving game state, It is possible to set the entry frequency of game balls to the first variable starting port 120B and the launch prize ball ratio. In any case, the combination of the three elements shown here is only an example, and if the three elements are combined so that the shot prize ball ratio is higher in the time-saving gaming state than in the non-time-saving gaming state good.

FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the game state according to the original game property according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. With the configuration described above, the gaming machine 100 realizes the following gameplay. Here, a case where the registration setting value is set to "1" will be described. First, in the initial state of the gaming machine 100, the normal state shown in FIG. 19(a) is set. In the normal state, since the substantial variable object is set to special 1 reservation, the player shoots the game ball toward the first game area 116a in order to enter the game ball into the first fixed starting port 120A. Since the first game area 116a is located on the left side of the game board 108, the player normally performs so-called "left-handed".

When the game ball enters the first fixed starting port 120A, the special 1 reservation is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area. The special 1 reservation stored in the first special figure reservation storage area is sequentially read out when the starting condition is established, and a major role lottery based on the read special 1 reservation is performed. At this time, the probability of winning the jackpot is set to approximately 1/300.6. In the normal state, the game is played for the purpose of winning a big win in the big win lottery based on this special 1 reservation. In addition, the shot prize ball ratio is set to 100:20 when the game balls are shot toward the first game area 116a, and the number of game balls decreases during the game.

Then, in a normal state, when a big win is won in a big win lottery with special 1 reservation, a big win game is executed. In this big win game, the round game in which the first big winning hole 126 is opened is executed 4 times or 10 times, and the player can win prize balls for 4 rounds or 10 rounds. Then, when a jackpot is won by special 1 reservation, one of the special patterns A to E is determined as a jackpot pattern.

In the normal state, when the jackpot symbol stop-displayed on the first special symbol display 160 is the special symbol A, the game state after the big win game becomes the low-probability time-saving state shown in FIG. 19(b). When a jackpot is won with special 1 reservation, the probability that the special pattern A is determined as a jackpot pattern is 30%. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the normal state, the game state shifts to the low-probability short-time state with a probability of 30%. In the low probability time saving state, the real fluctuation target is set to special 1 reservation, but since the normal game state is the time saving game state, the player enters the game ball into the first variable start port 120B. A right-handed shot is made aiming at the second game area 116b.

That is, in this low-probability short-time state, as in the normal state, in the big role lottery based on special 1 reservation, the game will be played for the purpose of winning the jackpot. In the low-probability time-saving state, the winning probability of the jackpot is about 1/300.6, but since the normal game state is the time-saving game state, the movable piece 120b is frequently opened. Therefore, the shot prize ball ratio is 100:99, and the player can aim for a big win while reducing consumption of game balls.

In addition, when moving to a low-probability time-saving state, the number of times of time-saving is set to 100 times, and if the jackpot is not won in 100 times of the big role lottery, the game state will shift to the normal state again (time-saving omission ).

Also, in the normal state, when the jackpot symbols stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 160 are the special symbols B and D, the game state after the big win game is the high-accuracy time-saving shown in (c) of FIG. state. When a jackpot is won with the special 1 reservation, the probability that the special symbols B and D are determined as the jackpot symbols is 35%. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the normal state, the game state shifts to the high-probability time-saving state with a probability of 35%. In the high-probability time-saving state, the real variable target is set to special 1 reservation, but since the normal game state is the time-saving game state, the player enters the game ball into the first variable start port 120B. A right-handed shot is made aiming at the second game area 116b.

In other words, in this high-probability time-saving state, as in the normal state, the game is played for the purpose of winning the jackpot in the big role lottery based on the special 1 reservation. In addition, the probability of winning the jackpot is about 1/105.7, and the normal game state is the time saving game state, so that the movable piece 120b is frequently opened. Therefore, the shot prize ball ratio is 100:99, and the player can perform the big role lottery while reducing consumption of game balls. Therefore, in the high-probability short-time state, substantially, it can be said that the winning of the next jackpot is guaranteed.

Also, in the normal state, when the jackpot symbols stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 160 are the special symbols C and E, the game state after the big win game is a high certainty omen shown in (d) of FIG. state. When a jackpot is won with the special 1 reservation, the probability that the special symbols C and E are determined as the jackpot symbols is 35%. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the normal state, the game state shifts to the high probability portent state with a probability of 35%. In the high probability omen state, the real fluctuation target is set to special 1 reservation, but since the normal game state is the time-saving game state, the player has to enter the game ball into the first variable start port 120B. A right-handed shot is made aiming at the second game area 116b.

Then, when the special symbols C and E are determined, the state is set to the high-probability portent state, and the number of times of time saving is set to 100 times. At this time, when the number of fluctuations after the big win game reaches 100 times, the time-saving game state ends, and the normal game state becomes a non-time-saving game state. As a result, the game state shifts to the highest priority state shown in (e) of FIG. 19 due to time saving. As will be described later in detail, in the highest priority state, the number of game balls can be increased simply by continuously shooting game balls toward the second game area 116b. Therefore, in the high-probability omen state, the purpose of the game is not to win the jackpot, but to get out of the game quickly without winning the jackpot.

According to the special 1 reservation of the real fluctuation target in the high probability omen state, high probability short working hours state, low probability short working hours state, special symbols A to E are determined as jackpot symbols when winning the jackpot. When the special symbol A is determined, four round games are executed in the big win game, and the game state after the big win game becomes the low probability time saving state shown in FIG. 19(b). Further, when the special symbols B and D are determined, the round game is executed 4 times or 10 times in the big win game, and the game state after the big win game becomes a high probability time saving state. Further, when the special symbols C and E are determined, the round game is executed 4 times or 10 times in the big win game, and the game state after the big win game becomes a high probability precursor state.

In the highest priority state, when the game ball enters the second starting port 122, the special 2 reservation is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area. The special 2 reserve stored in the second special figure reserve storage area is sequentially read out when the starting condition is established, and a major role lottery is performed based on the read special 2 reserve. At this time, the probability of winning the big prize is set to approximately 1/105.7, and the probability of winning the small prize is set to approximately 1/3.45. In the highest priority state, winning a small win is the most important purpose of the game in the big win lottery based on this special 2 reservation.

Specifically, when the game ball is launched into the second game area 116b, the ratio of the prize balls paid out by the game ball entering the second start port 122 to the number of launched balls is 100:60-80. is set to an extent. Then, in the highest priority state, in the big win lottery with special 2 reservation, a small winning game is frequently played because a small winning is won with a probability of about 1/3.45. Here, when a small win is won by special 2 reservation, small win symbols Z4 to Z6 are determined. As described above, in the small winning game when the small winning symbol Z4 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 162, an average of 2 to 3 game balls enter the second big winning hole 128. In the small winning game when the small winning symbol Z5 is stop-displayed on the second special symbol display 162, an average of 3 to 4 game balls enter the second big winning hole 128.例文帳に追加Furthermore, in the small winning game when the small winning symbol Z6 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 162, almost a specified number of game balls enter the second big winning opening 128.例文帳に追加

When a game ball enters the second big winning hole 128, for example, 15 prize balls are paid out for one game ball entering the game ball. As a result, in the highest priority state, the shot prize ball ratio, which is the ratio of the number of all prize balls to the number of shot balls, becomes 100:120. can be increased.

In addition, in this most dominant state, the normal game state is a non-time-saving game state, and the movable piece 120b is almost never in an open state. In addition, in the highest priority state, the special game state is a high probability game state, and the winning probability of the jackpot in the highest priority state is about 1/105.7. It can be said that the winning of the jackpot is guaranteed.

According to the special 2 reservation of the real variation object in this highest priority state, when the big win is won, the special symbols F to J are determined as the big win symbols. When the special symbol F is determined, four round games are executed in the big win game, and the game state after the big win game becomes the low-probability time-saving state shown in FIG. 19(b). Further, when the special symbols G and I are determined, the round game is executed 4 times or 10 times in the big win game, and the game state after the big win game becomes a high probability time saving state. Also, when the special symbols H and J are determined, the round game is executed 4 times or 10 times in the big win game, and the game state after the big win game becomes a high probability precursor state.

Since the most dominant state has an extremely high degree of advantage compared to other game states, the most important purpose of the game in the gaming machine 100 is to shift the game state to the most dominant state. As described above, the game is first started in the normal state, but the normal state does not suddenly transition to the highest priority state. Therefore, the transition route to the most dominant state via the high probability portent state is the transition route to the most dominant state in the gaming machine 100 .

Furthermore, in the simultaneous turning reference example, winning a specific small winning symbol is set as a transition condition from the high probability omen state to the most dominant state, apart from the time saving omission in the high probability omen state. Specifically, when a small hit is won by special 1 reservation, which is a real fluctuation target in a high certainty omen state, the special pattern Z1 is 1%, the special pattern Z2 is 69%, and the special pattern Z3 is 30 as a small winning pattern. % probability (see FIG. 8(c)).

At this time, when the special symbol Z1 is determined as the small winning symbol, the time saving game state ends with the end of the small winning game, and as a result, the game state shifts to the highest priority state.

In this way, since the state is shifted to the highest priority state by winning a specific small win, compared to the case where the state is shifted to the highest priority state only when the number of fluctuations reaches the specified number of times (100 times), it is easier for the player. Therefore, a sense of anticipation and a sense of tension are constantly imparted.

In addition, in the above-mentioned high probability omen state, high probability short working hours state, low probability short working hours state, a small hit is won with a probability of about 1/3.45. Therefore, in the high-probability omen state, the high-probability short working hours state, and the low-probable short working hours state, similarly to the most dominant state, the small winning game is frequently executed. However, the high-probability portent state, the high-probability short working hours state, and the low-probable short working hours state are all normal game states in the short working hours gaming state. In addition, although it will be described later in detail, even during the small winning game, the normal game state is maintained in the time saving game state. Therefore, although the second big winning opening 128 is opened during the small winning game, the first variable starting opening 120B is also opened during this time.

As described above, the first variable starting port 120B is provided above the second big winning port 128, and in the time saving game state, the opening time of the first variable starting port 120B is the second big winning much longer than the opening time of mouth 128. Therefore, in the high-probability omen state, high-probability short-time state, and low-probability short-time state, most of the game balls flowing down the second game area 116b enter the first variable starting port 120B, and enter the second big winning port 128. Almost no game ball enters. As a result, in the high-probability portent state, the high-probability short-time state, and the low-probability short-time state, unlike the most dominant state, even if the player hits right during the game, the number of game balls gradually decreases.

As described above, when the game progresses by the real variation object in accordance with the original game nature, when the jackpot is won, the gaming state after the big role game is a low probability time saving state, a high probability time saving state, a high probability omen state set to either. And, the high probability time saving state and the high probability omen state have in common that the special game state is the high probability game state and the normal game state is the time saving game state. On the other hand, the high-probability time-saving state continues until the next jackpot is won, whereas the high-probability omen state is the winning of a specific small hit (special symbol Z1) or the time-saving omission. The difference is that the state is shifted to the highest priority state.

Also, in the high-probability short-time state, the fluctuation time at the time of small hit and loss is set to 1 second, while in the high-probability omen state, the fluctuation time at the time of small hit and loss is 3 to 10 seconds. It differs in that it is set within the range (see FIG. 13(b)). That is, the average of the variable time in the high-probability short-time state is set shorter than the average of the variable time in the high-probability omen state.

Therefore, in the high-probability time-saving state, since the fluctuation time at the time of the small hit and the loss is relatively short, the real fluctuation object can be digested at high speed until the big hit is won. Although detailed description is omitted, during the special symbol variation time, the sub-control board 330 performs variable display of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c. In the high probability time saving state, the variable display of the production patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c is also relatively short. Therefore, in the high probability time saving state, as long as the special 1 reservation continues to be stored, the special 1 reservation (variable display of the production patterns 210a, 210b, 210c) will continue to be digested at high speed, and the time until winning the jackpot It can be shortened, and the game can be played until the next big win without (reduced) stress on the player.

On the other hand, in the high-probability omen state, the variation time is relatively long at the time of small win and at the time of loss, but in the sub-control board 330, an effect is performed as to whether or not to shift to the highest priority state. Therefore, the player can play while expecting that the game will shift to the highest priority state.

Thus, in the high-probability short-time state, even if a specific small hit (special pattern Z1) is won, it does not shift to the most dominant state, but by setting the average of the fluctuation time short, the next big hit It is possible to shorten the time until winning the prize, and reduce the stress on the player. In addition, in the high-probability omen state, the average of the fluctuation time is set longer than in the high-probability short-time state. It can give people a sense of expectation and a sense of tension.

As described above, the special game state is a high-probability game state, and the high-probability time-saving state and high-probability precursor state that are common to the normal game state being a time-saving game state are provided, and the fluctuation of the high-probability time-saving state By making the average of the time shorter than the average of the fluctuation time of the high-probability portent state, new playability can be provided.

FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the game state when the game is not properly played according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. As described above, in the gaming machine 100, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 160 and the symbol variation display on the second special symbol display device 162 are performed in parallel. At this time, if there is a possibility that the player will be disadvantaged as a result of the large winning lottery being held due to the hold other than the actual variable object, the variable time is set to a long time such as 10 minutes. However, after the big win lottery is performed due to the holding other than the real fluctuation target, for example, as a result of interrupting the game, the jackpot due to the holding other than the real fluctuation target may be decided. In this case, the game state changes as shown in FIG.

The main processing of the main control board 300 for realizing the above-described game characteristics will be described below.

FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining gaming machine state flags according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. In the main control board 300, whether or not the game is ready to progress is managed by a gaming machine state flag. One of six types of flag values from 00H to 05H is set in the gaming machine state flag. The flag value of the gaming machine state flag=00H indicates a playable state. When the gaming machine state flag is 00H, the progress of the game is controlled. be stopped.

The flag value of the game machine state flag=01H indicates a setting change state, and when the game machine state flag is 01H, the change operation of the registered setting value is possible. The flag value of the gaming machine state flag=02H indicates the setting confirmation state, and when the gaming machine state flag is 02H, the registered set value is displayed on the performance display monitor 184, and the registered set value is confirmed. It is possible to confirm. The flag value of the gaming machine state flag=03H indicates a setting abnormality state, and when the gaming machine state flag is 03H, the game is stopped as the registered setting value is abnormal. The flag value of the gaming machine state flag=04H indicates a RAM abnormal state, and when the gaming machine state flag is 04H, the game is stopped. The flag value of the gaming machine status flag=05H indicates an abnormal checksum status, and if the gaming machine status flag is 05H, the game is stopped. When the power is turned on, the game machine state flag is set to any flag value, and processing corresponding to the game machine state flag is performed.

(CPU initialization processing of main control board 300)
FIG. 22 is a first flowchart illustrating CPU initialization processing in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example, and FIG. 23 illustrates CPU initialization processing in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is the 2nd flowchart which carries out.

When power is supplied from the power board, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 300a, and the main CPU 300a performs the following CPU initialization processing (S100).

(Step S100-1)
When the power is turned on, the main CPU 300a reads a startup program from the main ROM 300b as an initial setting process, and performs setting processes necessary for executing various processes.

(Step S100-3)
The main CPU 300a sets the wait processing time in the timer counter.

(Step S100-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether a power-off warning signal is detected. A power interruption detection circuit is provided in the main control board 300, and a power interruption warning signal is output from the power interruption detection circuit when the power supply voltage drops below a predetermined value. If the power-off notice signal is detected, the process proceeds to step S100-3, and if the power-off notice signal is not detected, the process proceeds to step S100-7.

(Step S100-7)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the wait time set in step S100-3 has elapsed. As a result, when it is determined that the wait time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S100-9, and when it is determined that the wait time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S100-5.

(Step S100-9)
The main CPU 300a executes necessary processing to permit access to the main RAM 300c.

(Step S100-11)
The main CPU 300a loads the flag value of the gaming machine state flag before power-off to the D register.

(Step S100-13)
The main CPU 300a calculates the checksum and determines whether the calculated checksum matches (is normal) the checksum saved at the time of power failure and whether the backup flag is normal. As a result, if it is determined that the backup flag and checksum are normal, the process moves to step S100-15, and if either or both are determined to be abnormal, the process moves to step S100-25. .

(Step S100-15)
The main CPU 300a sets an address that does not include the setting value and the gaming machine status flag as the top address to be cleared in the main RAM 300c.

(Step S100-17)
The main CPU 300a determines whether a RAM clear operation signal has been input from the RAM clear switch 182s (whether the RAM clear button has been pressed). As a result, if it is determined that the RAM clear operation signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S100-31, and if it is determined that the RAM clear operation signal has not been input, the process proceeds to step S100-19. .

(Step S100-19)
The main CPU 300a checks whether the value of the gaming machine status flag loaded in step S100-11 is 00H (game ready status), whether the setting change switch 180s is on, and whether the middle frame 104 is open. judge. As a result, when it is determined that all three conditions are satisfied, the process moves to step S100-21, and when it is determined that even one of the three conditions is not satisfied, the process moves to step S100-23.

(Step S100-21)
The main CPU 300a sets the gaming machine state flag to 02H (setting confirmation state). That is, when the power is normally turned on in a state in which the middle frame 104 is open, the setting change switch 180s is on, and the RAM clear button is not pressed, the setting confirmation state is entered.

(Step S100-23)
The main CPU 300a executes an initialization process of clearing the areas to be cleared at the time of power return, which are the areas after the head address set in step S100-15 in the main RAM 300c, and shifts the process to step S100-49.

(Step S100-25)
The main CPU 300a sets 05H (checksum abnormal state) in the D register.

(Step S100-27)
The main CPU 300a performs out-of-area read/write check processing for checking and clearing the read/write memory in the out-of-use area.

(Step S100-29)
The main CPU 300a sets an address including a set value and a gaming machine state flag to the leading address to be cleared in the main RAM 300c.

(Step S100-31)
The main CPU 300a checks and clears the read/write memory of the used area.

(Step S100-33)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the check result of the read/write memory in step S100-31 is normal. As a result, if it is determined to be normal, the process moves to step S100-37, and if it is determined to be not normal, the process moves to step S100-35.

(Step S100-35)
The main CPU 300a sets 04H (RAM abnormal state) in the D register, and shifts the process to step S100-45.

(Step S100-37)
The main CPU 300a determines whether 02H (setting confirmation state) is set in the D register. As a result, when it is determined that 02H is set, the process moves to step S100-39, and when it is determined that 02H is not set, the process moves to step S100-41.

(Step S100-39)
The main CPU 300a sets 00H (game ready state) in the D register.

(Step S100-41)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the setting change condition is satisfied. As a result, when it is determined that the setting change condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S100-43, and when it is determined that the setting change condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S100-45. Here, at least the setting change conditions include that the setting change switch 180s is turned on, that the middle frame 104 is open, and that the RAM clear operation signal is input from the RAM clear switch 182s. included.

(Step S100-43)
The main CPU 300a sets 01H (setting change state) in the D register.

(Step S100-45)
The main CPU 300a saves the value set in the D register in the gaming machine state flag.

(Step S100-47)
The main CPU 300a executes an initialization process of clearing the clear target of the main RAM 300c when clearing the RAM, and shifts the process to step S100-49.

(Step S100-49)
The main CPU 300a performs a process of transmitting a payout command (RAM clear designation command) for transmitting to the payout control board 310 that the main RAM 300c has been cleared (stores the RAM clear designation command in a transmission buffer).

(Step S100-51)
The main CPU 300a loads the gaming machine state flag.

(Step S100-53)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the gaming machine state flag loaded in step S100-51 is 00H (playable state). As a result, if it is determined to be 00H, the process moves to step S110, and if it is determined not to be 00H, the process moves to step S100-55.

(Step S110)
The main CPU 300a performs subcommand group set processing. This subcommand group set process will be described later.

(Step S100-55)
The main CPU 300 a performs sub-command group set processing for transmitting a predetermined command to the sub-control board 330 .

(Step S100-57)
The main CPU 300a sets the cycle of the timer interrupt.

(Step S100-59)
The main CPU 300a performs processing for prohibiting interrupts.

(Step S100-61)
The main CPU 300a updates the initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number. The initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number is for determining the initial value and the end value of the winning symbol random number. In other words, when the winning design random number is updated from the winning design random number initial value update random number to the winning design random number initial value update random number -1, the winning design random number is at that time. It will be updated to the initial value update random number for the winning design random number.

(Step S100-63)
The main CPU 300a analyzes the received data (main command) received from the payout control board 310 and executes various processes according to the received data.

(Step S100-65)
The main CPU 300 a performs processing for transmitting the sub-commands stored in the transmission buffer to the sub-control board 330 .

(Step S100-67)
The main CPU 300a performs processing for permitting interrupts.

(Step S100-69)
The main CPU 300a updates the reach group determination random number, the reach mode determination random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number, and thereafter repeats the processing from step S100-59. In the following description, the reach group determination random number, the reach mode determination random number, and the variation pattern random number for determining the variable effect pattern are collectively referred to as variable effect random numbers.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart for explaining subcommand group set processing (S110) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S110-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the flag value of the gaming machine state flag.

(Step S110-3)
The main CPU 300 a performs sub-command group set processing for transmitting a predetermined command to the sub-control board 330 .

(Step S110-5)
The main CPU 300a performs a model command setting process of setting a model command indicating model information of the gaming machine 100 in a transmission buffer.

(Step S110-7)
The main CPU 300a performs setting value designation command setting processing for setting a setting value designation command indicating a registered setting value in a transmission buffer.

(Step S110-9)
The main CPU 300a performs a special figure 1 reservation designation command setting process for setting a special figure 1 reservation designation command indicating the number of special 1 reservations in the transmission buffer.

(Step S110-11)
The main CPU 300a performs a special figure 2 reservation designation command setting process for setting a special figure 2 reservation designation command indicating the number of special 2 reservations in the transmission buffer.

(Step S110-13)
The main CPU 300a performs a number command setting process of setting a number command indicating the remaining number of times of the time saving game state in the transmission buffer.

(Step S110-15)
The main CPU 300a performs a variation pattern selection state designation command setting process for setting a variation pattern selection state designation command indicating a variation pattern selection state in a transmission buffer.

(Step S110-17)
The main CPU 300a performs a special figure phase specification command setting process for setting a special figure phase specification command indicating a special game management phase in a transmission buffer. Incidentally, the special game management phase will be described later.

(Step S110-19)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special game management phase is waiting for a special symbol variation. As a result, when it is determined that it is in the special symbol variation waiting state, the processing is moved to step S110-21, and when it is determined that it is not in the special symbol variation waiting state, the subcommand group set processing is terminated.

(Step S110-21)
The main CPU 300a sets the customer waiting designation command in the transmission buffer, and terminates the subcommand group set process.

Next, interrupt processing in the main control board 300 will be described. Here, save processing (XINT interrupt processing) and timer interrupt processing at power failure will be described.

(Evacuation processing (XINT interrupt processing) when main control board 300 is powered off)
FIG. 25 is a flowchart for explaining save processing (XINT interrupt processing) at power-off in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. The main CPU 300a monitors the power failure detection circuit, and when the power supply voltage drops below a predetermined value, it interrupts the CPU initialization process and executes the save process at power failure.

(Step S300-1)
When the power-off warning signal is input, the main CPU 300a saves the register.

(Step S300-3)
The main CPU 300a checks the power-off warning signal.

(Step S300-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether a power-off warning signal is detected. As a result, when it is determined that the power cut warning signal is detected, the process is moved to step S300-11, and when it is determined that the power cut warning signal is not detected, the process is moved to step S300-7. .

(Step S300-7)
The main CPU 300a restores the register.

(Step S300-9)
The main CPU 300a performs processing for permitting an interrupt, and terminates the power-off save processing.

(Step S300-11)
The main CPU 300a executes output port clear processing to stop output from the output port.

(Step S300-13)
The main CPU 300a executes checksum setting processing for calculating and storing a checksum.

(Step S300-15)
The main CPU 300a executes RAM protection setting processing necessary to prohibit access to the main RAM 300c.

(Step S300-17)
The main CPU 300a sets the counter value of the loop counter to the predetermined number of power failure detection signal detections in order to set the power failure occurrence monitoring time.

(Step S300-19)
The main CPU 300a checks the power-off warning signal.

(Step S300-21)
The main CPU 300a determines whether a power-off warning signal is detected. As a result, when it is determined that the power cut warning signal is detected, the process is moved to step S300-17, and when it is determined that the power cut warning signal is not detected, the process is moved to step S300-23. .

(Step S300-23)
The main CPU 300a subtracts 1 from the value of the loop counter set in step S300-17.

(Step S300-25)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the counter value of the loop counter is zero. As a result, if it is determined that the counter value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S300-19, and if it is determined that the counter value is 0, the above-described CPU initialization process (step S100) is performed.

It should be noted that when the power is actually cut off, the operation of the game machine 100 is stopped while the steps S300-17 to S300-25 are being looped.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board 300)
FIG. 26 is a flowchart for explaining timer interrupt processing in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. The main control board 300 is provided with a reset clock pulse generation circuit that generates a clock pulse at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds in the simultaneous rotation reference example, hereinafter referred to as "4 ms"). Then, when a clock pulse is generated by the reset clock pulse generation circuit, the CPU initialization process (step S100) is interrupted, and the following timer interrupt process is executed.

(Step S400-1)
The main CPU 300a saves the register.

(Step S400-3)
The main CPU 300a performs processing for permitting interrupts.

(Step S400-5)
The main CPU 300a outputs the common data set in the common output buffer to the output port, the first special symbol indicator 160, the second special symbol indicator 162, the first special symbol reserve indicator 164, the second special symbol reserve. A dynamic port output process for controlling lighting of the display 166, the normal symbol display 168, the normal symbol reservation display 170, the right-handed information display 172, and the performance display monitor 184 is executed.

(Step S400-7)
The main CPU 300a reads various types of input port information and executes port input processing for accurately acquiring the latest switch state.

(Step S400-9)
The main CPU 300a loads the flag value of the gaming machine state flag.

(Step S400-11)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the flag value loaded in step S400-9 is 00H (playable state). As a result, when it is determined to be 00H, the process moves to step S400-15, and when it is determined not to be 00H, the process moves to step S400-13.

(Step S400-13)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the flag value loaded in step S400-9 is 03H (set abnormal state) or higher. As a result, if it is determined that it is 03H or more, the process moves to step S400-29, and if it is determined that it is not 03H or more, the process moves to step S450.

(Step S450)
The main CPU 300a executes setting-related processing, and shifts the processing to step S400-29. Note that the setting-related processing will be described later.

(Step S400-15)
The main CPU 300a performs timer update processing for updating various timer counters. Here, the various timer counters are decremented each time the timer interrupt processing of the main control board 300 is executed, and the decrementation is stopped when it reaches 0, unless otherwise specified.

(Step S400-17)
The main CPU 300a executes the process of updating the initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number in the same manner as in step S100-61.

(Step S400-19)
The main CPU 300a performs a process of updating the winning symbol random number. Specifically, the random number counter is updated by adding 1, and if the result of the addition exceeds the maximum value of the random number range, the random number counter is reset to 0. The random number is updated from the value of the initial value update random number for the winning design random number.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the simultaneous spinning reference example, the jackpot determination random number and the winning determination random number use hardware random numbers updated by a hardware random number generator built in the main control board 300. The hardware random number generator updates both the jackpot determined random numbers and the winning determined random numbers according to a fixed rule, automatically changes the random number sequence each time the random number sequence completes a cycle, and resets the start value each time the system is reset. are changing.

(Step S500)
The main CPU 300a includes a first fixed start opening detection switch 120As, a first variable start opening detection switch 120Bs, a second start opening detection switch 122s, a gate detection switch 124s, a normal figure operation opening detection switch 125s, and a first big winning opening detection switch. 126s, a switch management process for determining whether or not a signal has been input from the second big winning opening detection switch 128s is executed. The details of this switch management processing will be described later.

(Step S600)
The main CPU 300a executes a special game management process for controlling the progress of the variable display of the special symbols based on the special game reserved 2. The details of this special game management process will be described later.

(Step S600)
The main CPU 300a executes a special game management process for controlling the progress of the variable display of the special symbols based on the special game reserved 1st. In addition, here, the same program (module) as the special game management processing for controlling the progress of the variable display of the special symbols based on the special 2 reserve is read out, and the variable display of the special symbols based on the special 1 reserve is progressed. A special game management process for controlling is executed.

(Step S700)
The main CPU 300a executes a special electric role product game management process for controlling the progress of the big winning game and the small winning game in the special game. The details of this special electric role product game management process will be described later.

(Step S800)
The main CPU 300a executes normal game management processing for controlling the progress of the normal game. The details of this normal game management process will be described later.

(Step S400-21)
The main CPU 300a executes error management processing for determining various errors and making settings according to the error determination results.

(Step S400-23)
The main CPU 300a checks the general winning opening detection switch 118s, the first starting opening detection switch 120s, the second starting opening detection switch 122s, the first big winning opening detection switch 126s, and the second big winning opening detection switch 128s. Execute winning opening switch processing for adding a counter or the like for controlling winning balls.

(Step S400-25)
The main CPU 300a executes a payout control management process for creating and transmitting a payout command based on the counter value of the prize ball control counter set in step S400-23.

(Step S400-27)
The main CPU 300a sends a launching position specification command to the sub control board 330 to instruct the launching position of the game ball, that is, to which of the first game area 116a and the second game area 116b the game ball is to be launched. Execute position designation management processing.

(Step S400-29)
The main CPU 300a executes external information management processing for setting output data for external information to be output from the game information output terminal board 312 to the outside.

(Step S400-31)
The main CPU 300a has a first special symbol display 160, a second special symbol display 162, a first special symbol reservation display 164, a second special symbol reservation display 166, a normal symbol display 168, and a normal symbol reservation display 170. , LED display setting processing for setting display data for controlling the lighting of various indicators (LEDs) such as the right-handed information indicator 172 to the output buffer corresponding to each common.

(Step S400-33)
The main CPU 300a synthesizes the solenoid output images of the normal electric accessory solenoid 120c, the first big winning opening solenoid 126c, and the second big winning opening solenoid 128c, and executes the solenoid output image synthesis processing for storing in the output port buffer. .

(Step S400-35)
The main CPU 300a executes port output processing for outputting the common output buffer value stored in each output port buffer to the output port.

(Step S400-37)
The main CPU 300a performs processing for prohibiting interrupts.

(Step S400-39)
The main CPU 300a uses the non-use area of the main RAM 300c to perform processing for calculating the base ratio to be displayed on the performance display monitor 184, and common data for displaying the calculated base ratio on the performance display monitor 184. Executes performance display monitor control processing to be set in the output buffer. Note that in the performance display monitor control process, the base ratio is calculated for each predetermined period. Here, the performance display monitor 184 may alternately display the base ratio for the current period and the base ratio for the previous period at predetermined time intervals. Also, the base ratio displayed on the performance display monitor 184 may be switched according to a predetermined operation.

(Step S400-41)
The main CPU 300a restores the register and terminates the timer interrupt processing.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart for explaining the setting-related processing (S450) according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S450-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the flag value of the gaming machine state flag is 01H (setting change state). As a result, if it is determined to be 01H, the process moves to step S450-3, and if it is determined not to be 01H, the process moves to step S450-15.

(Step S450-3)
The main CPU 300a loads the registered set values stored in the set value buffer into a predetermined processing area.

(Step S450-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the RAM clear switch 182s has been pressed (whether a RAM clear operation signal has been input). As a result, when it is determined that the RAM clear switch 182s has been pressed, the process proceeds to step S450-7, and when it is determined that the RAM clear switch 182s has not been pressed, the process proceeds to step S450-9. .

(Step S450-7)
The main CPU 300a adds 1 to the set value of the processing area.

(Step S450-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the set value of the processing area is in the range of 1-6. As a result, when it is determined that the set value is within the range of 1 to 6, the process proceeds to step S450-13, and when it is determined that the set value is not within the range of 1 to 6, the process proceeds to step S450-11. to move.

(Step S450-11)
The main CPU 300a sets the set value of the processing area to one.

(Step S450-13)
The main CPU 300a sets the set value of the processing area in the set value buffer.

(Step S450-15)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the setting change switch 180s is turned on. As a result, if it is determined that the setting change switch 180s is turned on, the setting-related processing is terminated, and if it is determined that the setting change switch 180s is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S450-17.

(Step S450-17)
The main CPU 300a sets a setting-related end designation command indicating the end of the setting-related processing in the transmission buffer.

(Step S110)
The main CPU 300a executes the subcommand group set process of FIG. That is, if the setting related process is executed, at the end, model command, setting value designation command, special figure 1 reserve designation command, special figure 2 reserve designation command, number of times command, variation pattern selection state designation command, special figure phase A designation command and a customer waiting designation command are transmitted to the sub control board 330 .

(Step S450-19)
The main CPU 300a sets the gaming machine state flag to 00H (game ready state), and terminates the setting-related processing.

As described above, according to the simultaneous turning reference example, when the power is normally turned on with the middle frame 104 opened, the setting change switch 180s turned on, and the RAM clear button depressed, the CPU initializes. In the change processing (FIG. 22), 01H (setting change state) is set to the gaming machine state flag. After that, timer interrupt processing is executed, but since 01H (setting change state) is set in the gaming machine state flag, all processing related to the progress of the game (steps S400-15 to S400-27 in FIG. 26) ) is stopped and configuration related processing is executed.

The setting-related processing is repeatedly executed while the setting change switch 180s is on, and during this setting-related processing, the operation of pressing the RAM clear button is accepted as the setting change operation of the registered set value. That is, during the setting change process (S450-1 to S450-13) for accepting the setting change operation, the registered setting value stored in the setting value buffer is one of the setting values provided in a plurality of stages according to the setting change operation. can be switched to

When the setting change switch 180s is turned off while the gaming machine state flag is set to 01H (setting change state), the setting change processing is terminated and the gaming machine state flag is set to 00H (playable state). set. As a result, from the next timer interrupt process, the process relating to the progress of the game can be executed.

Here, in the setting-related processing of the simultaneous rotation reference example, after the operation of pressing the RAM clear button, that is, after accepting the setting change operation of the registered setting value, in the subcommand group set processing, the setting value corresponding to the registered setting value is specified. A command is sent to the sub control board 330 . On the other hand, no setting value designation command is transmitted to the sub control board 330 while the setting change operation is being accepted. In this way, the setting value designation command is not transmitted while the setting change operation is being accepted, and the setting value designation command is transmitted when the acceptance of the setting change operation is completed and the state shifts to a state in which the game can be progressed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the risk of unauthorized acquisition of registered setting values.

Further, in the simultaneous turning reference example, a plurality of flag values including at least 01H (setting change state) are switched. Then, when 01H (setting change state) is set in the gaming machine state flag, the setting-related processing can be executed and the progress of the game is stopped. In this way, since the setting-related processing is not executed while the game is in progress, the setting value designation command is not transmitted while the game is in progress, and the risk of illegally acquiring the registered setting values is reduced. be done.

Next, among the above timer interrupt processes, the switch management process at step S500, the special game management process at step S600, the special electric role product game management process at step S700, and the normal game management process at step S800 will be described in detail. .

FIG. 28 is a flowchart for explaining switch management processing (step S500) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S500-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the gate detection switch ON is detected, that is, whether the game ball passes through the gate 124 and the detection signal from the gate detection switch 124s is turned on. As a result, when it is determined that the gate detection switch-on is detected, the process proceeds to step S510, and when it is determined that the gate detection switch-on is not detected, the process proceeds to step S500-7.

(Step S510)
The main CPU 300 a executes gate passage processing based on passage of the game ball through the gate 124 . The details of this gate passage processing will be described later.

(Step S500-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the normal pattern operation opening detection switch is turned on, that is, whether a game ball enters the normal pattern operation opening 125 and the detection signal from the normal pattern operation opening detection switch 125s is turned on. . As a result, if it is determined that the normal pattern operation port detection switch is turned on, the process proceeds to step S510, and if it is determined that the normal pattern operation port detection switch is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S500-5. to move.

(Step S510)
The main CPU 300 a executes gate passing processing based on the entry of a game ball into the normal pattern operation opening 125 .

(Step S500-5)
The main CPU 300a detects whether the first fixed starting hole detection switch is turned on, that is, whether a game ball enters the first fixed starting hole 120A and a detection signal is input from the first fixed starting hole detection switch 120As. judge. As a result, if it is determined that it is time to detect the first fixed starting port detection switch ON, the process proceeds to step S520, and if it is determined that it is not time to detect the first fixed starting port detection switch ON, step S500-7. to process.

(Step S520)
The main CPU 300a executes the first starting hole passing process based on the entry of the game ball into the first fixed starting hole 120A. The details of the first starting opening passage processing will be described later.

(Step S500-7)
The main CPU 300a detects whether the first variable starting hole detection switch is turned on, that is, whether a game ball enters the first variable starting hole 120B and a detection signal is input from the first variable starting hole detection switch 120Bs. judge. As a result, when it is determined that the first variable starter detection switch is turned on, the process proceeds to step S520, and when it is determined that the first variable starter detection switch is not turned on, step S500-11. to process.

(Step S520)
The main CPU 300a executes the first starting opening passing process based on the entry of the game ball into the first variable starting opening 120B. The details of the first starting opening passage processing will be described later.

(Step S500-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the game ball has been properly entered into the first variable starting port 120B, and if it is determined that the game ball has not been properly entered, the first A confirmation process at the time of normal electric accessary prize winning is executed for transmitting to the sub control board 330 a general electric fraudulent prize winning error generation designation command indicating the entry of an illegal game ball to the variable start port 120B.

(Step S500-11)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the second starting hole detection switch is turned on, that is, whether a game ball enters the second starting hole 122 and a detection signal is input from the second starting hole detection switch 122s. As a result, if it is determined that it is time to detect the second starting port detection switch ON, the process proceeds to step S530, and if it is determined that it is not time to detect the second starting port detection switch ON, the process proceeds to step S500-13. to move.

(Step S530)
The main CPU 300 a executes the second starting hole passing process based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 122 . The details of the second starting opening passage processing will be described later.

(Step S500-13)
The main CPU 300a detects when the big winning hole detection switch is turned on, that is, when a game ball enters the first big winning hole 126 or the second big winning hole 128, the first big winning hole detection switch 126s or the second big winning hole detection switch 126s or the second big winning hole detection switch 126s It is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the big winning opening detection switch 128s. As a result, if it is determined that the large winning opening detection switch is turned on, the process proceeds to step S540, and if it is determined that the large winning opening detection switch is not turned on, the switch management process is terminated.

(Step S540)
When the main CPU 300a determines whether the game ball has been properly entered into the first big winning hole 126 or the second big winning hole 128, and determines that the game ball has been properly entered. , a large winning hole passing process for transmitting a large winning hole entry command indicating the entry of a game ball into the first big winning hole 126 or the second big winning hole 128 to the sub control board 330 is executed. The details of this special winning opening passage processing will be described later.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart for explaining the gate passing process (step S510) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous turning reference example.

(Step S510-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the winning determination random number updated by the hardware random number generator.

(Step S510-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter is greater than or equal to the maximum value, that is, whether the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter is 4 or more. As a result, when it is determined that the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter is equal to or higher than the maximum value, the gate passing process is terminated, and when it is determined that the normal symbol reserved ball number counter is not equal to or higher than the maximum value. The process moves to step S510-5.

(Step S510-5)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value.

(Step S510-7)
The main CPU 300a calculates a target storage unit for saving the acquired winning determination random number, among the four storage units of the normal-pattern reservation storage area.

(Step S510-9)
The main CPU 300a saves the winning determination random number obtained in step S510-1 in the target storage section calculated in step S510-7.

(Step S510-11)
The main CPU 300a sets a general pattern reservation specification command indicating the general pattern reservation number stored in the general pattern reservation storage area in the transmission buffer, and ends the gate passage processing.

FIG. 30 is a flow chart for explaining the first starting opening passing process (step S520) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous turning reference example.

(Step S520-1)
The main CPU 300a sets "00H" as the special symbol identification value. In addition, the special symbol identification value is for identifying whether the reservation type is special 1 reservation or special 2 reservation, special symbol identification value (00H) indicates special 1 reservation, special symbol identification value ( 01H) indicates special 2 reservation.

(Step S520-3)
The main CPU 300a sets the address of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter.

(Step S535)
The main CPU 300a executes the special symbol random number acquisition process, and ends the first starting opening passage process. It should be noted that this special symbol random number acquisition process is executed using a module common to the second start opening passage process (step S530). Therefore, the details of the special symbol random number acquisition process will be described after the description of the second start opening passage process.

FIG. 31 is a flow chart for explaining the second start opening passing process (step S530) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous turning reference example.

(Step S530-1)
The main CPU 300a sets "01H" as the special symbol identification value.

(Step S530-3)
The main CPU 300a sets the address of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter.

(Step S535)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol random number acquisition process, which will be described later, and ends the second start opening passage process.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart for explaining the special symbol random number acquisition process (step S535) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous turning reference example. This special symbol random number acquisition process is executed using a common module in the above-described first starting opening passing process (step S520) and second starting opening passing process (step S530).

(Step S535-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the special symbol identification value set in step S520-1 or step S530-1.

(Step S535-3)
The main CPU 300a loads the number of target special symbol reserved balls. Here, if the special symbol identification value loaded in step S535-1 is "00H", the counter value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter, that is, the special 1 reserved number is loaded. Also, if the special symbol identification value loaded in step S535-1 is "01H", the counter value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter, that is, the special 2 reserved number is loaded.

(Step S535-5)
The main CPU 300a loads the jackpot determination random number updated by the hardware random number generator.

(Step S535-7)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the number of target special symbol reserved balls loaded in step S535-3 is equal to or greater than the upper limit. As a result, when it is determined that it is above the upper limit value, the special symbol random number acquisition process is terminated, and when it is determined that it is not above the upper limit value, the process is moved to step S535-9.

(Step S535-9)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the target special symbol reserved ball number counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value.

(Step S535-11)
The main CPU 300a calculates a target storage section for saving the acquired jackpot decision random number among the storage sections of the special figure reservation storage area.

(Step S535-13)
The main CPU 300a acquires the jackpot determination random number loaded in step S535-5, the winning pattern random number updated in step S400-19, and the variation pattern random number updated in step S100-69, and obtains the variation pattern random number updated in step S535-11. Store in the target storage unit calculated in .

(Step S535-15)
The main CPU 300a loads the counter values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter.

(Step S535-17)
The main CPU 300a sets the special figure reserve designation command in the transmission buffer based on the counter value loaded in step S535-15. Here, based on the counter value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter (special 1 reserved number), the special figure 1 reserved designation command is set, and based on the counter value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter (special 2 reserved number) to set the special figure 2 hold designation command. As a result, the number of special 1 reservations and the number of special 2 reservations are transmitted to the sub control board 330 each time special 1 reservations or special 2 reservations are stored.

(Step S536)
The main CPU 300a performs the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, and ends the special symbol random number acquisition process. In this acquisition time effect determination process, the result of the big role lottery, the variation pattern number, etc. are tentatively determined, and a prefetch designation command according to the result of the tentative determination is transmitted to the sub control board 330 . This effect determination process at the time of acquisition will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart for explaining the effect determination process (step S536) at the time of acquisition in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous turning reference example.

(Step S536-1)
The main CPU 300a selects a corresponding jackpot determination random number determination table based on the set value being set. Specifically, based on the current game state and the set value being set, the corresponding big hit determination random number determination table is selected. Then, based on the selected table and the big hit determination random number stored in the target storage unit in step S535-13, a special symbol winning temporary determination process for temporarily determining any one of big win, small win, and loss is performed.

(Step S536-3)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol temporary determination process for temporarily determining a special symbol. Here, if the result of the temporary major role lottery in step S536-1 (the result derived by the special symbol per temporary determination process) is a big hit or a small hit, it is stored in the target storage unit in step S535-13. Load the hit symbol random number, winning type (whether it is a big win or a small win), and hold type, select the corresponding winning symbol random number determination table, extract the special symbol determination data, and extract the special symbol determination data. Save (type of jackpot pattern or small hit pattern). In addition, when the result of the provisional key role lottery in step S536-1 is a loss, predetermined special symbol determination data for loss (type of losing symbol) is saved.

(Step S536-5)
The main CPU 300a sets a look-ahead symbol type specification command (a look-ahead specification command) corresponding to the special symbol determination data saved in step S536-3 in the transmission buffer.

(Step S536-7)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the result derived by the special symbol winning temporary determination process in step S536-1 is a big win or a small win. As a result, if it is determined to be a big win or a small win, the process moves to step S536-9, and if it is determined to be neither a big win or a small win (it is a loss), the process moves to step S536-11.

(Step S536-9)
The main CPU 300a sets the reach mode determination random number determination table (see FIGS. 10(b) and (c)) or the reach mode determination random number determination table (see FIGS. 10(d) and (e)) at the time of the small hit, and step The process moves to S536-19.

(Step S536-11)
The main CPU 300a loads the reach group determination random number stored in the target storage unit in step S535-13.

(Step S536-13)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the reach group determination random number loaded in step S536-11 is a fixed value (9000 or more). Here, the group type is determined by referring to the reach group determination random number determination table, and this reach group determination random number determination table is selected according to the stored number of reservations. At this time, the reach group determination random number is obtained from the range of 0 to 10006, and if the value of the reach group determination random number is 9000 or more, regardless of the number of reservations, the same reach group determination random number determination table is selected, and reach If the value of the group determination random number is less than 9000, different reach group determination random number determination tables are selected according to the number of reservations. In the following, among the reach group determination random numbers, a value in the range of 0 to 8999 in which a different reach group determination random number determination table is selected according to the number of reservations is an indefinite value, and the same reach group determination random number determination is performed regardless of the number of reservations. A value in the range of 9000 to 10006 from which the table is selected is called a fixed value. If it is determined that the reach group determination random number loaded in step S536-11 is a fixed value (9000 or more), the process moves to step S536-15, and the reach group determination random number loaded in step S536-11 is fixed. If it is determined not to be the value (9000 or more), the process moves to step S536-27.

(Step S536-15)
The main CPU 300a sets a reach group determination random number determination table (see FIG. 9). Although a plurality of reach group determination random number determination tables are provided according to the number of reservations, here, the table used when the number of reservations is 0 is selected. Then, the reach group (group type) is tentatively determined based on the set reach group determination random number determination table and the reach group determination random number stored in the target storage unit in step S535-13.

(Step S536-17)
The main CPU 300a sets the losing reach mode determination random number determination table (see FIG. 10A) corresponding to the group type provisionally determined in step S536-15, and shifts the process to step S536-19.

(Step S536-19)
The main CPU 300a determines the variation mode number based on the reach mode determination random number determination table set in step S536-9 or step S536-17 and the reach mode determination random number stored in the target storage unit in step S535-13. provisionally determined. Further, here, along with the variation mode number, a variation pattern random number determination table is tentatively determined.

(Step S536-21)
The main CPU 300a sets, in the transmission buffer, the prefetch designation variation mode command (prefetch designation command) corresponding to the variation mode number tentatively determined in step S536-19.

(Step S536-23)
The main CPU 300a temporarily determines the variation pattern number based on the variation pattern random number determination table provisionally determined in step S536-19 and the variation pattern random number stored in the target storage unit in step S535-13.

(Step S536-25)
The main CPU 300a sets the look-ahead specified variation pattern command (pre-read specification command) corresponding to the variation pattern number tentatively determined in step S536-23 in the transmission buffer, and ends the effect determination process at the time of acquisition.

(Step S536-27)
The main CPU 300a, regarding the suspension newly stored in the target storage unit, according to the number of suspensions when the suspension is read out, changes the group type, that is, the variable effect pattern (undefined value command (prefetch Specified variation mode command and look-ahead specified variation pattern command = 7FH) is set in the transmission buffer, and the effect determination process at the time of acquisition is terminated.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart for explaining the big winning opening passage processing (step S540) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous spinning reference example.

(Step S540-1)
When the main CPU 300a determines in step S500-13 that the large winning opening detection switch is turned on, it loads a special electric accessory game management phase, which will be described later in detail. In addition, although it will be described later in detail, the special electric role product game management phase indicates the stage of execution processing of the big role game or the small winning game, that is, the progress status of the big role game or the small winning game. It is updated according to the stage of the execution process of the winning game.

(Step S540-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the special electric role product game management phase loaded in step S540-1 indicates the stage of the execution process above the big winning hole opening pre-process. The special electric accessory game management phase is provided with 9 stages from 00H to 08H. Of these, 01H to 08H correspond to the stage of execution processing above the big winning opening pre-opening processing. Since the big win game or the small winning game is executed when the special electric role product game management phase is 01H to 08H, it is determined whether it is currently in the big winning game or the small winning game. Become. If it is determined that the special electric role product game management phase indicates the stage of execution processing above the big winning opening pre-processing, the process is moved to step S540-5, and the special electric role product game management phase is If it is determined that it does not indicate the stage of the execution process above the big winning opening pre-opening process, the process proceeds to step S540-7.

(Step S540-5)
The main CPU 300a sets, in the transmission buffer, a big winning hole entry command indicating that the game ball has properly entered the first big winning hole 126 or the second big winning hole 128, and ends the big winning hole passage processing. .

(Step S540-7)
The main CPU 300a determines that the entry of the game ball into the first big winning hole 126 or the second big winning hole 128 is inappropriate, executes a predetermined error process, and ends the big winning hole passing process.

FIG. 35 is a diagram for explaining the special game management phase according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. As already explained, in the simultaneous turning reference example, the special game triggered by the entry of the game ball to the first start port 120 or the second start port 122, the passage of the game ball to the gate 124 or the normal figure operation port A normal game triggered by the entry of a game ball into 125 progresses in parallel. The processing related to the special game is executed step by step and repeatedly, but in the main control board 300, each processing related to such a special game is managed by a special game management phase and a special electric accessory game management phase. .

As shown in FIG. 35, the main ROM 300b stores a plurality of special game control modules for executing and controlling the variable display of special symbols in the special game. Management phase is associated. Specifically, when the special game management phase is "00H", a module for executing the "special symbol variation waiting process" is called, and when the special game management phase is "01H", A module for executing a "special symbol fluctuating process" is called, and when the special game management phase is "02H", a module for executing a "special symbol stop symbol display process" is called.

Also, the main ROM 300b stores a plurality of special electric role product game control modules for executing and controlling the big win game and the small winning game among the special games, and for each of these special electric role product game control modules, A special electric accessory game management phase is associated. Specifically, when the special electric role product game management phase is "01H" or "05H", a module for executing the "pre-processing for opening the big prize opening" is called, and the special electric role product game management is performed. When the phase is ``02H'' or ``06H'', a module for executing the ``large winning opening opening control process'' is called, and the special electric accessory game management phase is ``03H'' or ``07H''. In this case, a module for executing the "large winning opening closing effective process" is called, and when the special electric role product game management phase is "04H" or "08H", the "big winning opening closing wait process ” is called. In addition, when the special electric role product game management phase is "00H", none of the special electric role product game control modules are called.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart for explaining the special game management process (step S600) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous spinning reference example.

(Step S600-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the special electric accessory game management phase.

(Step S600-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special electric role product game management phase loaded in step S600-1 is other than "00H". That is, here, it is determined whether it is currently in the big win game or in the small winning game. If it is determined that the special electric role product game management phase is other than "00H", the special game management process is terminated, and if it is determined that the special electric role product game management phase is not other than "00H", step S600. -5 is processed.

(Step S600-5)
The main CPU 300a loads a special game special symbol determination flag. It should be noted that the special game special symbol determination flag is for determining whether the special game special symbol determination flag (00H ) indicates special 1 suspension, and the special game special symbol determination flag (01H) indicates special 2 suspension.

(Step S600-7)
The main CPU 300a inverts the special game special symbol determination flag loaded in step S600-5. Here, when the special game special symbol determination flag is "00H", it is reversed to "01H", and when the special game special symbol determination flag is "01H", it is reversed to "00H". Since the initial value of the special game special symbol determination flag is set to "00H", the special game special symbol determination is performed in the first special game management process S600 of the two special game management processes S600 shown in FIG. The flag is set to "01H", the subsequent processing is executed for the special 2 reservation, the special game special symbol determination flag is set to "00H" in the second special game management processing S600, and the subsequent processing is executed for the special 1 reservation. be done. In other words, the special 2 reservation is preferentially processed.

(Step S600-9)
The main CPU 300a saves the special game special symbol determination flag reversed in step S600-7.

(Step S600-11)
The main CPU 300a loads the special game management phase.

(Step S600-13)
The main CPU 300a selects the special game control module corresponding to the special game management phase loaded in step S600-11.

(Step S600-15)
The main CPU 300a calls the special game control module selected in step S600-13 and starts processing.

(Step S600-17)
The main CPU 300a loads a special game timer that manages the special game control time, and terminates the special game management process.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart for explaining the special symbol variation waiting process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous turning reference example. This special symbol variation waiting process is executed when the special game management phase is "00H".

(Step S610-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the number of special symbol reserved balls of the reservation (special 1 reservation or special 2 reservation, hereinafter referred to as target reservation) subject to special game management processing is 1 or more. As a result, when it is determined that the number of special symbol reserved balls is 1 or more, the process is moved to step S610-3, and when it is determined that the number of special symbol reserved balls is not 1 or more, the special symbol variation waiting process exit.

(Step S610-3)
The main CPU 300a is finalizing a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as a non-target special symbol) based on a suspension (special 2 suspension or special 1 suspension, hereinafter referred to as non-target suspension) that is not subject to special game management processing. Determine if there is As a result, when it is determined that the non-target special symbol is being determined, the process is shifted to step S610-5, and when it is determined that the special symbol based on the non-target special symbol is not being determined, step S610-9. to process.

(Step S610-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the non-target special symbol is a jackpot symbol. As a result, when it is determined that it is a jackpot pattern, the special symbol variation waiting process is terminated, and when it is determined that it is not a jackpot pattern, the process is moved to step S610-7.

(Step S610-7)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the non-target special symbol is a small winning symbol. As a result, when it is determined that it is a small winning pattern, the special symbol variation waiting process is terminated, and when it is determined that it is not a small winning pattern, the process is moved to step S610-9.

(Step S610-9)
The main CPU 300a block-transfers the target suspension stored in the first to fourth storage units of the special figure suspension storage area corresponding to the target suspension to the storage unit with a smaller ordinal number. Specifically, the object holds stored in the second to fourth storage units are transferred to the first to third storage units. In addition, the main RAM 300c is provided with a 0th storage unit to be processed, and the object suspension stored in the 1st storage unit is block-transferred to the 0th storage unit. In addition, in this special symbol storage area shift process, the counter value of the target special symbol retention ball number counter corresponding to the target retention is decremented by "1", and the retention decrement indicating that the target retention is decremented by "1" Sets the specified command in the transmission buffer.

(Step S611)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol hit determination process for performing a big winning lottery. This special symbol hitting determination processing will be described later.

(Step S610-11)
The main CPU 300a executes special symbol determination processing for determining special symbols. Here, if the result of the big win lottery in step S611 is a big win or a small win, the winning symbol random number and the reserved type transferred to the 0th storage unit are loaded, and the corresponding winning symbol random number judgment table or small winning symbol is loaded. A random number determination table is selected to extract special symbol determination data, and the extracted special symbol determination data (type of jackpot symbol) is saved. Further, when the result of the big winning lottery in step S611 is a loss, the special symbol determination data for a loss is saved. After saving the special symbol determination data, a symbol type designation command corresponding to the special symbol determination data is set in the transmission buffer.

(Step S610-13)
The main CPU 300a saves the special symbol stop symbol number corresponding to the special symbol determination data extracted in step S610-11. In addition, the first special symbol display 160 and the second special symbol display 162 are each composed of 7 segments, and each segment constituting the 7 segments is associated with a number (counter value). The special symbol stop symbol number determined here indicates the number (counter value) of the segment that is finally lit.

(Step S612)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol variation number determination process for determining a variation mode number and a variation pattern number. The details of this special symbol variation number determination process will be described later.

(Step S610-15)
The main CPU 300a loads the variation mode number and variation pattern number determined in step S612, and determines variation time 1 and variation time 2 with reference to the variation time determination table. Then, the total time of the determined variable times 1 and 2 is set in the special symbol variable timer.

(Step S610-17)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the result of the big win lottery is a big win, and if it is a big win, loads the special symbol determination data saved in step S610-11 and confirms the type of the big win symbol. do. Then, with reference to the game state setting table and the current game state, to determine the game state and the high probability number of times to be set after the end of the big role game, the number of times of time reduction, the determination result is the special pattern probability state preliminary flag, time reduction state preliminary Save to the flag, high-precision cut spare counter, and time-saving cut spare counter. It should be noted that, when the lost pattern is saved, the process proceeds to the next process without executing the process.

(Step S610-19)
The main CPU 300a executes a process of setting a special symbol display symbol counter in the first special symbol display device 160 or the second special symbol display device 162 in order to start variable display of special symbols. A counter value is associated with each segment of the 7 segments that constitute the first special symbol display device 160 and the second special symbol display device 162, and the segment corresponding to the counter value set in the special symbol display symbol counter is Lighting is controlled. Here, the counter value corresponding to the segment to be lit at the start of the variable display of the special symbols is set in the special symbol display symbol counter. As for the special symbol display symbol counter, a special symbol 1 display symbol counter corresponding to the first special symbol display device 160 and a special symbol 2 display symbol counter corresponding to the second special symbol display device 162 are separately provided. Here, the counter value is set to the counter corresponding to the hold type.

(Step S613)
The main CPU 300a executes a number cutting management process. Here, processing for ending the time-saving gaming state is performed according to the number of fluctuations. This number cutting management process will be described later.

(Step S610-21)
The main CPU 300a sets a frequency command indicating the remaining frequency (actual remaining frequency) until the high probability frequency and the time saving frequency become 0 in the transmission buffer.

(Step S610-23)
The main CPU 300a sets a game state change designation command indicating the game state at the start of the variable display of special symbols in the transmission buffer.

(Step S610-25)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "01H" and terminates the special symbol variation waiting process.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart for explaining the special symbol hit determination process (S611) according to the simultaneous spinning reference example.

(Step S611-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the special symbol probability state flag.

(Step S611-3)
The main CPU 300a loads the registered setting values in the setting value buffer.

(Step S611-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the registered set value loaded in step S611-3 is within the normal range. As a result, when it is determined that the value is within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S611-11, and when it is determined that the value is not within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S611-7.

(Step S611-7)
The main CPU 300a sets the gaming machine state flag to 03H (set abnormal state).

(Step S611-9)
The main CPU 300a sets the setting abnormal state command (subcommand) in the transmission buffer, and terminates the special symbol hit determination process. When this abnormal setting state command is transmitted to the sub control board 330, notification of the abnormal setting is made.

(Step S611-11)
The main CPU 300a refers to the big win determination random number determination table corresponding to the information loaded in steps S611-1 and S611-3, and sets the lower limit and upper limit when determining a big win or a small win.

(Step S611-13)
The main CPU 300a compares the jackpot determination random number transferred to the 0th storage unit with the above-described lower and upper limit values, and performs determination processing (big win lottery) to determine whether or not a jackpot or small win has been won.

(Step S611-15)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the non-target special symbol is a jackpot symbol. As a result, when it is determined to be a jackpot pattern, the process moves to step S611-17, and when it is determined not to be a jackpot pattern, the process moves to step S611-21.

(Step S611-17)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the big winning lottery result in step S611-13 is a small win or a loss. As a result, if it is determined to be a small win or a loss, the process moves to step S611-21, and if it is determined to be neither a small win nor a loss, the process moves to step S611-19.

(Step S611-19)
The main CPU 300a changes the big role lottery result in step S611-13 to lose.

(Step S611-21)
The main CPU 300a sets the result of the determination process in step S611-13 or the result changed in step S611-19 as determination information, and ends the special symbol win determination process.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart for explaining the special symbol variation number determination process (step S612) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous turning reference example.

(Step S612-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the result of the big win lottery in step S611 is a big win or a small win. As a result, when it is determined that it is a big hit or a small hit, the process is moved to step S612-3, and when it is determined that it is neither a big hit nor a small hit (it is a loss), the process goes to step S612-5. Transfer.

(Step S612-3)
The main CPU 300a sets a ready-to-win mode determination random number determination table corresponding to the current gaming state and pending type.

(Step S612-5)
The main CPU 300a confirms the counter value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter when the read reservation type is Special 2 reservation, and when the read reservation type is Special 1 reservation, Check the counter value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter.

(Step S612-7)
The main CPU 300a sets the corresponding reach group determination random number determination table based on the current gaming state, the number of pending games confirmed in step S612-5, and the type of pending game. Then, the reach group (group type) is determined based on the set reach group determination random number determination table and the reach group determination random number transferred to the 0th storage unit in step S610-9.

(Step S612-9)
The main CPU 300a sets the reach mode determination random number determination table at the time of losing corresponding to the group type determined in step S612-7.

(Step S612-11)
The main CPU 300a determines the variable mode based on the reach mode determination random number determination table set in step S612-3 or step S612-9 and the reach mode determination random number transferred to the 0th storage unit in step S610-9. Decide on a number. Also, here, along with the variation mode number, a variation pattern random number determination table is determined.

(Step S612-13)
The main CPU 300a sets the variable mode command corresponding to the variable mode number determined in step S612-11 in the transmission buffer.

(Step S612-15)
The main CPU 300a determines the variation pattern number based on the variation pattern random number determination table determined in step S612-11 and the variation pattern random number transferred to the 0th storage unit in step S610-9.

(Step S612-17)
The main CPU 300a sets the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number determined in step S612-15 in the transmission buffer, and terminates the special symbol variation number determination process.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart for explaining the number cutting management process (step S613) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S613-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the number of times of time saving, that is, the counter value of the time saving number cutting counter is greater than zero. As a result, when it is determined that the number of times of time saving is greater than 0, the process proceeds to step S613-3, and when it is determined that the number of times of time saving is 0, the number cutting management process is ended.

(Step S613-3)
The main CPU 300a decrements the time-saving cut-off counter.

(Step S613-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value (number of times of time saving) has been updated to 0 in step S613-3. As a result, when it is determined that the number of times of time saving is 0, the process proceeds to step S613-7, and when it is determined that the number of times of time saving is not 0, the number cutting management process ends.

(Step S613-7)
The main CPU 300a sets the time saving state flag in order to set the normal game state to the non time saving game state. As a result, after the normal game state is set to the time-saving game state, the normal game state is changed to a non-time-saving game state at the start of fluctuation when the number of fluctuations reaches the time-saving number of times (here, 50 times or 100 times). The Rukoto. For example, if it is set to the highly probable portent state, it will be set to the highest priority state.

(Step S613-9)
The main CPU 300a turns on the time saving end flag and ends the number cutting management process.

FIG. 41 is a flow chart for explaining the processing during special symbol fluctuation in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous turning reference example.

(Step S620-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the interrupted flag is on. Although details will be described later, in the simultaneous spinning reference example, while the first special symbol display 160 is displaying the symbols fluctuating, the second special symbol display 162 may stop displaying the small winning symbols. In this case, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 162, the small winning game is executed. , After the end of the small winning game, the variable display of the symbols on the first special symbol display device 160 is resumed. The interrupted flag is turned on when the first special symbol display 160 is in the process of changing symbols when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162 . Here, when it is determined that the interrupting flag is ON, the special symbol variation process is ended, and when it is determined that the interrupting flag is not ON, the process is moved to step S620-3.

(Step S620-3)
The main CPU 300a executes processing for updating the special symbol variation base counter. In addition, the counter value of the special symbol variation base counter is set so as to make one round at a predetermined period (for example, 100 ms). Specifically, when the counter value of the special symbol variation base counter is "0", a predetermined counter value (for example, 25) is set, and when the counter value is "1" or more, Update the counter value to the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the current counter value.

(Step S620-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the special symbol variation base counter updated in step S620-3 is "0". As a result, if the counter value is "0", the process proceeds to step S620-7, and if the counter value is not "0", the process proceeds to step S620-11.

(Step S620-7)
The main CPU 300a performs a special symbol variation timer update process of subtracting a predetermined value from the timer value of the special symbol variation timer set in step S610-15.

(Step S620-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special symbol variation timer updated in step S620-7 is "0". As a result, if the timer value is "0", the process moves to step S620-17, and if the timer value is not "0", the process moves to step S620-11.

(Step S620-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the special symbol display timer that counts the lighting time of each segment of the 7 segments that constitute the first special symbol display 160 and the second special symbol display 162. FIG. Specifically, when the timer value of the special symbol display timer is "0", a predetermined timer value is set, and when the timer value is "1" or more, from the current timer value Update the timer value to the value decremented by "1".

(Step S620-13)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special symbol display timer is "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the special symbol display timer is "0", the processing is moved to step S620-15, and when it is determined that the timer value of the special symbol display timer is not "0", the End the process during special symbol fluctuation.

(Step S620-15)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the special symbol display symbol counter to be updated, and ends the special symbol changing process. As a result, the segments that make up the 7 segments are sequentially lit at predetermined time intervals.

(Step S620-17)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the non-target special symbol is being variably displayed. As a result, when it is determined that the non-target special symbol is being variably displayed, the process is moved to step S621, and when it is determined that the non-target special symbol is not being variably displayed, the process is moved to step S620-19.

(Step S621)
The main CPU 300a executes symbol forced stop processing. This symbol forced stop processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Step S620-19)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "02H".

(Step S620-21)
The main CPU 300a saves the special symbol stop symbol number (counter value) determined in step S610-13 in the target special symbol display symbol counter. As a result, the determined special symbol is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162 .

(Step S620-23)
The main CPU 300a sets a special symbol stop designation command indicating that the special symbols are stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 160 or the second special symbol display device 162 in the transmission buffer.

(Step S620-25)
The main CPU 300a sets the special symbol variation stop time, which is the time during which the special symbols are stopped and displayed, in the special game timer, and terminates the special symbol variation process.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart for explaining the pattern forced stop processing (step S621) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S621-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special symbol that is being displayed (in question) is a small winning symbol. As a result, when it is determined that it is a small winning pattern, the process is moved to step S621-3, and when it is determined that it is not a small winning pattern, the process is moved to step S621-11.

(Step S621-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special game special symbol determination flag is 00H, that is, whether the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 160 or not. As a result, when it is determined that the special game special symbol determination flag is 00H, the process is moved to step S621-11, and when it is determined that the special game special symbol determination flag is not 00H, the process proceeds to step S621-5. to move.

(Step S621-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the (other) special symbol during variable display is a jackpot symbol. As a result, when it is determined that it is a jackpot pattern, the process is shifted to step S621-11, and when it is determined that it is not a jackpot pattern, the process is shifted to step S621-7.

(Step S621-7)
The main CPU 300a turns on the interrupted flag.

(Step S621-9)
The main CPU 300a executes a fluctuation interruption process for interrupting the fluctuation display of the special symbols, and terminates the forced symbol stop process. Here, a process of temporarily saving the remaining time of the fluctuation time and the information related to the special symbol in a predetermined storage area is performed.

(Step S621-11)
The main CPU 300a forces the first special symbol display device 160 or the second special symbol display device 162 on which the symbols are displayed to variably stop losing symbols, and forcibly terminates the remaining variation time. A process for turning on the stop flag is performed, and the symbol forced stop process is terminated.

By the above processing, when the small winning symbol is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display 160, the second special symbol display 162 is forcibly stopped-displayed the losing symbol. Further, when the small winning design is stop-displayed on the second special design display device 162, if the big winning design is finally stopped and displayed on the first special design display device 160 during the variable display, the first special design display. A lost symbol is displayed on the device 160 for forced stop. On the other hand, when the small winning design is stop-displayed on the second special design display device 162, if the small winning design or the losing design is in the fluctuation display that is finally stopped and displayed on the first special design display device 160, the second The variable display on the 1 special symbol display 160 is temporarily interrupted.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart for explaining a special symbol stop symbol display process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S630-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special game timer set in step S620-25 is not "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the special symbol stop symbol display process is terminated, and when it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is "0". The process moves to step S630-3.

(Step S630-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the variable time special stop flag is ON. As a result, when it is determined that the variable time special stop flag is ON, the process is moved to step S630-5, and when it is determined that the variable time special stop flag is not ON, the special symbol stop symbol display process is terminated. do.

(Step S630-5)
The main CPU 300a confirms the result of the big role lottery.

(Step S630-7)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the result of the big role lottery is a loss. As a result, if it is determined to be a loss, the process moves to step S630-27, and if it is determined to be not a loss, the process moves to step S630-9.

(Step S630-9)
The main CPU 300a performs a game state update process for updating the game state. Here, the game state is set to the initial state when the special symbol being stopped and displayed is a big winning symbol, and when the special symbol being stopped and displayed is a small winning symbol, the next processing is performed as it is.

(Step S630-11)
The main CPU 300a sets the data of the special electric accessary product operating ram set table according to the determined special symbol type. Note that the main CPU 300a turns off the variable time special stop flag when it is on.

(Step S630-13)
The main CPU 300a performs a special electric accessary product maximum operating frequency setting process. Specifically, referring to the data set in the above step S630-11, a predetermined number (counter value corresponding to the type of special symbol = number of rounds) is set as a counter value in the special electric accessory maximum operation counter. . It should be noted that this special electric accessory maximum operation number counter indicates the number of rounds that can be executed in the big winning game to be started from now on. On the other hand, the main RAM 300c is provided with a special electric accessory continuous operation number counter, and at the start of each round game, by adding "1" to the counter value of the special electric accessory continuous operation number counter, the current The number of round games is managed. Here, a process of resetting (updating to "0") the counter value of the special electric role product continuous operation number counter is executed together with the start of the big winning game.

(Step S630-15)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data set in step S630-11 and saves a predetermined opening time as a timer value in the special electric accessory game timer.

(Step S630-17)
The main CPU 300a sets an opening designation command for transmitting the start of the big win game to the sub control board 330 in the transmission buffer.

(Step S630-19)
The main CPU 300a updates the special electric role product game management phase to "01H" when starting the big win game, and updates the special electric role product game management phase to "05H" when starting the small winning game. .

(Step S630-21)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "00H".

(Step S630-23)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special electric role product game management phase updated in step S630-19 is "01H", that is, whether it is a big win. As a result, when it is determined that the special electric role product game management phase is "01H", the process is shifted to step S630-25, and when it is determined that the special electric role product game management phase is not "01H" , the process moves to step S630-27.

(Step S630-25)
The main CPU 300a performs a jackpot signal output start process for outputting a jackpot signal from the game information output terminal plate 312, and ends the special symbol stop symbol display process. By this process, a big hit signal is output with the start of the big win game (opening). Although a plurality of signals are provided to be output from the game information output terminal board 312, only a predetermined jackpot signal will be described here.

(Step S630-27)
The main CPU 300a sets, in the transmission buffer, a game state confirmation designation command at the time of special symbol determination, which indicates the game state when the special symbol is determined.

(Step S630-29)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the time saving end flag is turned on. As described above, the time saving end flag is turned on in step S613-9 of FIG. 40 at the start of fluctuation when changing from the time saving game state to the non-time saving game state. That is, if the time saving end flag is turned on here, at the time of the 50th or 100th fluctuation start in the high probability omen state, the normal game state is changed from the time saving game state to the non-time saving game state due to the time saving omission is the case. That is, here, it is determined that the time saving end flag is ON only when the fluctuation at the time of time saving time ends. If it is determined that the time saving end flag is on, the process moves to step S630-31, and if it is determined that the time saving end flag is not on, the process moves to step S630-35.

(Step S630-31)
The main CPU 300 a performs jackpot signal output stop processing for stopping the jackpot signal output from the game information output terminal plate 312 . That is, the jackpot signal is output during the big win game or during the time saving game state.

(Step S630-33)
The main CPU 300a turns off the time saving end flag.

(Step S630-35)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "00H" and terminates the special symbol stop symbol display process.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart for explaining the special electric role product game management process (step S700) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous turning reference example.

(Step S700-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the special electric accessory game management phase.

(Step S700-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special electric role product game management phase loaded in step S700-1 is "00H". That is, here, it is now determined whether or not during the big win game and during the small winning game. When it is determined that the special electric role product game management phase is "00H", the special electric role product game management process is terminated, and when it is determined that the special electric role product game management phase is not "00H", step The process moves to S700-5.

(Step S700-5)
The main CPU 300a selects the special electric role product game control module corresponding to the special electric role product game management phase loaded in step S700-1.

(Step S700-7)
The main CPU 300a calls the special electric accessory game control module selected in step S700-5 and starts processing.

(Step S700-9)
The main CPU 300a loads a special electric role product game timer that manages the control time of the special electric role product game, and ends the special electric role product game management process.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart for explaining the big winning opening pre-opening process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. This big winning hole pre-opening process is executed when the special electric role product game management phase is "01H" and "05H".

(Step S710-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special electric role product game timer set in step S630-15 or the like is not "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the special electric role-playing game timer is not "0", the big winning opening pre-opening process is terminated, and the timer value of the special electric role-playing game timer is "0". If so, the process moves to step S710-3.

(Step S710-3)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the special electric accessory continuous operation number counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value.

(Step S710-5)
The main CPU 300a sets, in the transmission buffer, a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (the start of the round game) to the sub-control board 330. FIG.

(Step S711)
The main CPU 300a executes the big winning opening opening/closing switching process. This special winning opening opening/closing switching process will be described later.

(Step S710-7)
The main CPU 300a updates the special electric role product game management phase to a value obtained by adding 01H to the current value ("02H" or "06H"), and terminates the pre-opening processing for the big winning opening.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart for explaining the big winning opening open/close switching process (S711) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous spinning reference example.

(Step S711-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the special electric role product opening/closing switching frequency counter is the upper limit value of the special electric role product opening/closing switching frequency (the number of opening/closing times of the big winning opening during one round game). As a result, when it is determined that the counter value is the upper limit value, the big winning opening opening/closing switching process is terminated, and when it is determined that the counter value is not the upper limit value, the process is shifted to step S711-3.

(Step S711-3)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data in the special electric role product operating ramset table, and energizes the first big prize opening solenoid 126c and the second big prize opening solenoid 128c based on the counter value of the special electric role product opening/closing switching frequency counter. Solenoid control data for control and time data representing the energization time or energization stop time are extracted.

(Step S711-5)
Based on the solenoid control data extracted in step S711-3, the main CPU 300a starts energizing the first big winning opening solenoid 126c or the second big winning opening solenoid 128c, or determines whether to stop the energization. Winning opening solenoid energization control processing is executed. By executing this big winning opening solenoid energization control process, in steps S400-33 and S400-35, energization start or stop of the first big winning opening solenoid 126c or the second big winning opening solenoid 128c is controlled. It will happen.

(Step S711-7)
The main CPU 300a saves the timer value based on the time data extracted in step S711-3 in the special electric accessory game timer. It should be noted that the timer value saved in the special electric accessory game timer here is the maximum opening time for one time of the big winning opening.

(Step S711-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the energization of the first big winning opening solenoid 126c or the second big winning opening solenoid 128c is started, that is, the first big winning opening solenoid 126c or the second big winning opening solenoid 128c in step S711-5. It is determined whether a control process for starting energization has been performed. As a result, when it is determined that it is in the energization start state, the process is moved to step S711-11, and when it is determined that it is not in the energization start state, the big winning opening opening/closing switching process is ended.

(Step S711-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the special electric accessory opening/closing switching frequency counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value, and ends the big winning opening opening/closing switching process.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart for explaining the big winning opening opening control process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. This big winning opening control process is executed when the special electric role product game management phase is "02H" or "06H".

(Step S720-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special electric accessory game timer saved in step S711-7 is not "0". As a result, if it is determined that the timer value of the special electric auditors game timer is not "0", the process is shifted to step S720-5, and it is determined that the timer value of the special electric auditors game timer is "0". If so, the process moves to step S720-3.

(Step S720-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the special electric accessory opening/closing switching frequency counter is the upper limit value of the special electric accessory opening/closing switching frequency. As a result, if it is determined that the counter value is the upper limit value, the process moves to step S720-7, and if it is determined that the counter value is not the upper limit value, the process moves to step S711.

(Step S711)
In the above step S720-3, when it is determined that the counter value of the special electric role product open/close switching frequency counter is not the upper limit value of the special electric role product opening/closing switching frequency, the main CPU 300a executes the processing of step S711. do.

(Step S720-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the big winning hole winning ball number counter updated in step S500-9 has reached the specified number. It is determined whether or not the game ball has entered. As a result, when it is determined that the specified number has not been reached, the big winning opening opening control process is terminated, and when it is determined that the specified number has been reached, the process proceeds to step S720-7.

(Step S720-7)
The main CPU 300a stops the energization of the first big winning opening solenoid 126c or the second big winning opening solenoid 128c, and executes the big winning opening closing process necessary to close the big winning opening. As a result, the big winning opening is closed.

(Step S720-9)
The main CPU 300a saves the large winning opening closing valid time (interval time) in the special electric accessory game timer.

(Step S720-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the special electric role product game management phase to a value obtained by adding 01H to the current value ("03H" or "07H").

(Step S720-13)
The main CPU 300a sets, in the transmission buffer, a large winning opening closing designation command indicating that the large winning opening is closed, and ends the special winning opening opening control process.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart for explaining the large winning opening closing effective process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. This big winning opening closing valid process is executed when the special electric role product game management phase is "03H" or "07H".

(Step S730-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special electric accessory game timer saved in step S720-9 is not "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the special electric role-playing game timer is not "0", the big winning opening closing effective process is terminated, and the timer value of the special electric role-playing game timer is "0". If so, the process moves to step S730-3.

(Step S730-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the special electric role product continuous operation frequency counter matches the counter value of the special electric role product maximum operation frequency counter, that is, whether the preset number of round games has ended. . As a result, if it is determined that the counter value of the special electric accessory continuous operation number counter matches the counter value of the special electric accessory maximum operation number counter, the process is moved to step S730-9, and if it is determined that they do not match to step S730-5.

(Step S730-5)
The main CPU 300a updates the special electric accessory game management phase to "01H". In addition, when the special electric role product game management phase is 07H, that is, during the control of the small winning game, the number of round games of the small winning game is "1", so the step S730-3 is always YES. It is determined, and the process does not move to the step concerned.

(Step S730-7)
The main CPU 300a saves a predetermined large winning opening closing time in the special game timer, and ends the special winning opening closing effective process. As a result, the next round game is started.

(Step S730-9)
The main CPU 300a executes an ending time setting process for saving the ending time in the special electric accessory game timer.

(Step S730-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the special electric accessory game management phase to a value obtained by adding 01H to the current value ("04H" or "08H").

(Step S730-13)
The main CPU 300a sets an ending designation command indicating the start of the ending in the transmission buffer, and terminates the special winning opening closing enable process.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart for explaining the big winning opening end wait process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. This big winning opening end wait process is executed when the special electric role product game management phase is "04H" or "08H".

(Step S740-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special electric accessory game timer saved in step S730-9 is not "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the special electric role-playing game timer is not "0", the big winning opening end wait process is terminated, and the timer value of the special electric role-playing game timer is "0". If so, the process moves to step S740-3.

(Step S740-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special electric role product game management phase is "08H", that is, whether the small winning game is finished. As a result, when it is determined that the special electric role product game management phase is "08H", the process is moved to step S740-11, and when it is determined that the special electric role product game management phase is not "08H" The process moves to step S740-5.

(Step S740-5)
The main CPU 300a executes state setting processing for setting the game state after the end of the big win game. Here, the game state set in the preliminary area in step S610-17, the number of times of high accuracy, and the number of times of time saving are loaded, and the setting of each flag and the counter value are set as the game state after the big win game.

(Step S740-7)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the normal game state has been set to the non-time-saving game state in step S740-5. As a result, when it is determined that the non-time-saving gaming state has been set, the process proceeds to step S740-9, and when it is determined that the non-time-saving gaming state is not set, the process proceeds to step S740-21.

(Step S740-9)
The main CPU 300 a performs jackpot signal output stop processing for stopping the jackpot signal output from the game information output terminal plate 312 . That is, when the highest priority state is set after the big win game, the output of the big win signal is stopped with the end of the big win game.

(Step S740-11)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the current gaming state is a high-probability precursor state (high-probability gaming state and time-saving gaming state). As a result, if it is determined that the state is a highly probable portent state, the process proceeds to step S740-13, and if it is determined that the state is not a highly probable portent state, the process proceeds to step S740-21.

(Step S740-13)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the stop-displayed small winning symbol is the special symbol Z1. As a result, when it is determined that it is the special design Z1, the process is moved to step S740-15, and when it is determined that it is not the special design Z1, the process is moved to step S740-21.

(Step S740-15)
The main CPU 300a sets a time saving state flag in order to change the normal game state to a non time saving game state. As a result, when the special symbol Z1 is determined in the high-probability portent state, the game state is changed to the most dominant state at the end of the small winning game.

(Step S740-17)
The main CPU 300a performs a counter reset process for resetting the time saving number counter.

(Step S740-19)
The main CPU 300 a performs jackpot signal output stop processing for stopping the jackpot signal output from the game information output terminal plate 312 . That is, when the special symbol Z1 is won and the highest priority state is set after the small winning game is played, the output of the big winning signal is stopped when the small winning game ends.

(Step S740-21)
The main CPU 300a sets, in the transmission buffer, a game state change designation command for transmitting the game state to be set after the end of the big win game.

(Step S740-23)
The main CPU 300a sets a frequency command corresponding to the high accuracy frequency and the time saving frequency in the transmission buffer.

(Step S740-25)
The main CPU 300a updates the special electric role product game management phase to "00H", and ends the big winning opening end wait process. As a result, when special 1 suspension or special 2 suspension is stored, the variable display of the symbols is resumed.

FIG. 50 is a diagram for explaining the normal game management phase according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. As already explained, in the simultaneous turning reference example, the processing related to the normal game triggered by the passage of the game ball to the gate 124 or the entry of the game ball to the normal pattern operation port 125 is stepwise and repeated. Although it is executed, in the main control board 300, each process related to such a normal game is managed by the normal game management phase.

As shown in FIG. 50, the main ROM 300b stores a plurality of normal game control modules for controlling execution of a normal game, and each normal game control module is associated with a normal game management phase. . Specifically, when the normal game management phase is "00H", a module for executing the "normal symbol variation waiting process" is called, and when the normal game management phase is "01H", A module for executing a "normal symbol fluctuating process" is called, and when the normal game management phase is "02H", a module for executing a "normal symbol stop symbol display process" is called and normal When the game management phase is "03H", a module for executing "ordinary electric accessory winning opening preprocessing" is called, and when the normal game management phase is "04H", "normal When the module for executing the "Electric Accessory Item Winning Portion Open Control Process" is called and the normal game management phase is "05H", the module for executing the "Normal Electric Accessory Item Winning Portion Closing Effective Processing" is called, and when the normal game management phase is "06H", a module for executing "normal electric accessory winning opening end wait process" is called.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart for explaining normal game management processing (step S800) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous spinning reference example.

(Step S800-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the normal game management phase.

(Step S800-3)
The main CPU 300a selects the normal game control module corresponding to the normal game management phase loaded in step S800-1.

(Step S800-5)
The main CPU 300a calls the normal game control module selected in step S800-3 and starts processing.

(Step S800-7)
The main CPU 300a loads a normal game timer that manages the normal game control time.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart for explaining normal symbol variation waiting processing in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous turning reference example. This normal symbol variation waiting process is normally executed when the game management phase is "00H".

(Step S810-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter and determines whether the counter value is "0", that is, whether the normal pattern reserved ball number counter is "0". As a result, when it is determined that the counter value is "0", the normal symbol variation waiting process is ended, and when it is determined that the counter value is not "0", the process is moved to step S810-3.

(Step S810-3)
The main CPU 300a block-transfers the general pattern reservation (hitting decision random number) stored in the first to fourth storage units of the general pattern reservation storage area to the storage unit with a lower ordinal number. Specifically, the general map hold stored in the second to fourth storage units is transferred to the first to third storage units. In addition, the main RAM 300c is provided with a 0th storage unit to be processed, and transfers the normal pattern suspension stored in the 1st storage unit to the 0th storage unit. In addition, in this normal design storage area shift process, the counter value of the normal design reservation ball number counter is decremented by "1", and a normal design reservation reduction designation command is transmitted to indicate that the normal design reservation has subtracted "1". set in the buffer.

(Step S810-5)
The main CPU 300a loads the winning determination random number transferred to the 0th storage unit, selects a winning determination random number determination table corresponding to the current game state, performs a general pattern lottery, and stores the lottery result. Execute the judgment process.

(Step S810-7)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal symbol stop symbol number corresponding to the result of the normal symbol lottery in step S810-5. In the simultaneous turning reference example, the normal symbol display 168 is composed of one LED lamp. Let The normal symbol stop symbol number determined here indicates whether or not the normal symbol display 168 is finally lit. is determined, and in the case of a loss, "1" is determined as the normal symbol stop symbol number.

(Step S810-9)
The main CPU 300a confirms the current game state, selects and sets the corresponding normal symbol variation time data table.

(Step S810-11)
The main CPU 300a determines the normal symbol variation time based on the hit determination random number transferred to the 0th storage unit in step S810-3 and the normal symbol variation time data table set in step S810-9.

(Step S810-13)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal symbol fluctuation time determined in step S810-11 in the normal game timer.

(Step S810-15)
The main CPU 300a executes a process of setting a normal symbol display symbol counter in the normal symbol display device 168 in order to start variable display of normal symbols. For example, when "0" is set as the counter value in this normal design display pattern counter, the lighting of the normal design display 168 is controlled, and when "1" is set as the counter value, the normal design is displayed. device 168 is controlled to turn off. Here, a predetermined counter value is set in the normal symbol display symbol counter at the start of variable display of normal symbols.

(Step S810-17)
The main CPU 300a sets a general pattern reservation specification command indicating the general pattern reservation number stored in the general pattern reservation storage area in the transmission buffer.

(Step S810-19)
The main CPU 300a sends a normal symbol designation command to the transmission buffer based on the normal symbol stop symbol number determined in step S810-7, that is, the symbol type (hit symbol or losing symbol) determined by the normal symbol win determination process. set to

(Step S810-21)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "01H" and terminates the normal symbol variation waiting process.

FIG. 53 is a flow chart for explaining the process during normal symbol fluctuation in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous turning reference example. This process during normal symbol fluctuation is normally executed when the game management phase is "01H".

(Step S820-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal game timer saved in step S810-13 is "0". As a result, if the timer value is "0", the process moves to step S820-9, and if the timer value is not "0", the process moves to step S820-3.

(Step S820-3)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal symbol display timer that times the lighting time and the extinguishing time of the normal symbol display 168 . Specifically, when the timer value of the normal symbol display timer is "0", a predetermined timer value is set, and when the timer value is "1" or more, from the current timer value Update the timer value to the value decremented by "1".

(Step S820-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal symbol display timer is "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the normal symbol display timer is "0", the processing is shifted to step S820-7, and when it is determined that the timer value of the normal symbol display timer is not "0", the The process during normal design fluctuation is ended.

(Step S820-7)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the normal symbol display symbol counter. Here, when the counter value of the normal symbol display symbol counter is a counter value indicating that the normal symbol display 168 is turned off, the counter value is updated to indicate lighting, and the counter value indicating that the normal symbol display 168 is lit. When it is, it updates to the counter value which shows lighting-out, ends the processing during the normal design fluctuation. As a result, the normal symbol display 168 repeats lighting and extinguishing (blinking) at predetermined time intervals over the normal symbol fluctuation time.

(Step S820-9)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal symbol stop symbol number (counter value) determined in step S810-7 in the normal symbol display symbol counter. As a result, the normal symbol display 168 is finally controlled to light or extinguish, and the result of the normal symbol lottery is notified.

(Step S820-11)
The main CPU 300a sets the normal symbol fluctuation stop time, which is the time during which the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, in the normal game timer.

(Step S820-13)
The main CPU 300a sets a normal pattern stop specifying command indicating that the stop display of the normal pattern is started in the transmission buffer.

(Step S820-15)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "02H", and terminates the normal symbol changing process.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart for explaining normal symbol stop symbol display processing in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This normal symbol stop symbol display process is executed when the normal game management phase is "02H".

(Step S830-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal game timer set in step S820-11 is not "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the normal symbol stop symbol display process is terminated, and when it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0". The process moves to step S830-3.

(Step S830-3)
The main CPU 300a confirms the result of the normal drawing lottery.

(Step S830-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the result of the general pattern lottery is winning. As a result, if it is determined to be a hit, the process moves to step S830-9, and if it is determined to be not a win (lost), the process moves to step S830-7.

(Step S830-7)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "00H" and terminates the normal symbol stop symbol display process. As a result, the normal game management processing based on one normal pattern reservation is completed, and when the normal pattern reservation is stored, the processing for starting the variable display of the normal pattern based on the next reservation is performed. becomes.

(Step S830-9)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data of the opening/closing control pattern table, and saves the time before opening the general electric power to the normal game timer as a timer value.

(Step S830-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "03H" and terminates the normal symbol stop symbol display process. As a result, the opening/closing control of the first variable starting port 120B is started.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart for explaining normal electric accessory winning opening pre-opening processing in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous turning reference example. This normal electric accessory winning opening pre-opening process is executed when the normal game management phase is "03H".

(Step S840-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal game timer set in step S830-9 is not "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the normal electric accessory winning opening pre-opening process is terminated, and the timer value of the normal game timer is determined to be "0". If so, the process moves to step S841.

(Step S841)
The main CPU 300a executes normal electric accessory winning opening opening/closing switching processing. This ordinary electric accessory winning opening opening/closing switching process will be described later.

(Step S840-3)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "04H", and terminates the normal electric accessory winning opening pre-opening process.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart for explaining normal electric accessory winning opening opening/closing switching processing in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous turning reference example.

(Step S841-1)
The main CPU 300a determines that the counter value of the normal electric accessory opening/closing switching frequency counter is the upper limit value of the normal electric accessory opening/closing switching frequency (the number of opening/closing times of the movable piece 120b of the first variable starting port 120B during one opening/closing control). Determine if there is As a result, when it is determined that the counter value is the upper limit value, the normal electric accessory winning opening opening/closing switching process is terminated, and when it is determined that the counter value is not the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S841-3. Transfer.

(Step S841-3)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data in the opening/closing control pattern table, and based on the counter value of the normal electric accessory opening/closing switching counter, the solenoid control data (energization control data or energization control data) for controlling the energization of the normal electric accessory solenoid 120c. stop control data), and the time data that is the energization time (solenoid energization time) or the energization stop time of the normal electric accessories solenoid 120c (normal power closing valid time = pause time) is extracted.

(Step S841-5)
Based on the solenoid control data extracted in step S841-3, the main CPU 300a starts energizing the normal electric accessory solenoid 120c, or the normal electric role for stopping the energization of the normal electric accessory solenoid 120c. Executes an object solenoid energization control process. By executing this ordinary electric accessory solenoid energization control process, in the above steps S400-33 and S400-35, control of the energization start or energization stop of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 120c is performed.

(Step S841-7)
The main CPU 300a saves the timer value based on the time data extracted in step S841-3 in the normal game timer. In addition, the timer value saved in the normal game timer here is the maximum opening time of the first variable starting port 120B.

(Step S841-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the normal electric accessory solenoid 120c is in the energization start state, that is, whether the control process for starting the energization of the normal electric accessory solenoid 120c has been performed in step S841-5. As a result, when it is determined that it is in the energization start state, the process is moved to step S841-11, and when it is determined that it is not in the energization start state, the normal electric accessory winning opening opening/closing switching process ends.

(Step S841-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the normal electric accessory open/close switching frequency counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart for explaining normal electric accessory winning opening control processing in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous turning reference example. This normal electric accessory winning opening control process is executed when the normal game management phase is "04H".

(Step S850-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal game timer saved in step S841-7 is not "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the process proceeds to step S850-5, and when it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0", step S850 -3 is processed.

(Step S850-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the normal electric accessory opening/closing switching frequency counter is the upper limit value of the normal electric accessory opening/closing switching frequency. As a result, if it is determined that the counter value is the upper limit value, the process moves to step S850-7, and if it is determined that the counter value is not the upper limit value, the process moves to step S841.

(Step S841)
If it is determined in step S850-3 that the counter value of the normal electric accessory opening/closing switching frequency counter is not the upper limit value of the normal electric accessory opening/closing switching frequency, the main CPU 300a executes the processing of step S841. do.

(Step S850-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the normal electric accessory winning ball number counter updated in step S530-9 has reached the specified number, that is, the first variable starting port 120B is under control of opening and closing once. It is determined whether or not the same number of game balls as the maximum number of possible wins have entered. As a result, if it is determined that the specified number has not been reached, the normal electric accessory winning opening control process is terminated, and if it is determined that the specified number has been reached, the process proceeds to step S850-7.

(Step S850-7)
The main CPU 300a stops energizing the normal electric accessory solenoid 120c and executes normal electric accessory closing processing necessary to close the first variable starting port 120B. As a result, the first variable starting port 120B is closed.

(Step S850-9)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal electric valid state time in the normal game timer.

(Step S850-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "05H", and terminates the normal electric accessory winning opening control process.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart for explaining normal electric accessory winning opening closing effective processing in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous turning reference example. This normal electric accessory winning opening closing effective process is executed when the normal game management phase is "05H".

(Step S860-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal game timer saved in step S850-9 is not "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the normal electric accessory winning opening closing effective process is terminated, and the timer value of the normal game timer is determined to be "0". If so, the process moves to step S860-3.

(Step S860-3)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal electric end wait time in the normal game timer.

(Step S860-5)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "06H", and terminates the normal electric accessory winning opening closing valid process.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart for explaining normal electric accessory winning opening end wait processing in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous turning reference example. This normal electric accessory winning opening end wait process is executed when the normal game management phase is "06H".

(Step S870-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal game timer saved in step S860-3 is not "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the normal electric accessory winning opening end wait process is terminated, and the timer value of the normal game timer is determined to be "0". If so, the process moves to step S870-3.

(Step S870-3)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "00H", and ends the normal electric accessory winning opening end wait process. As a result, when normal pattern suspension is stored, the variable display of normal patterns is resumed. Next, as a reference example of effects, a specific effect that can be executed in the above-described first-class game machine, first-class and second-class game machine, and simultaneous spinning machine, and specific processing related to the effect will be described.

<Production reference example>
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining an example of the variation effect of the non-reach variation pattern according to the effect reference example. As described above, when the main control board 300 carries out the big win lottery, during the variable display of the special symbols, that is, over the time period during which the special symbols fluctuate, the variable performance for notifying the result of the big win lottery is executed. In this variable effect, various background images are displayed in the main effect display section 200a, and effect patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed superimposed on the background image. During the variable effect, along with the image displayed on the main effect display unit 200a, sound is output from the audio output device 206, the lighting of the effect lighting device 204 is controlled, and the effect accessory device 202 is turned on. The movement is controlled, but detailed description is omitted here.

The variation production according to the production reference example is roughly divided into a reach-less variation pattern and a reach variation pattern. In the variation effect of the non-reach variation pattern, a background image (not shown) is displayed on the main effect display section 200a, and the effect patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are superimposed on the background image and variably displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 60(a), it is assumed that performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are stop-displayed in a combination indicating that the winning lottery result is lost. In this state, when the variable display of the special symbols is newly performed, three performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are variably displayed as shown in FIG. (scroll display). Note that the downward white arrows in the drawing indicate that the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are scroll-displayed in the height direction.

Then, as shown in FIG. 60(c), the effect symbol 210a is first stopped and displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 60(d), the effect symbol 210c different from the effect symbol 210a is stopped and displayed. Then, at almost the same timing as when the variable display of the special symbols is completed and the special symbols are stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 160 or the second special symbol display device 162, as shown in FIG. , and the effect symbol 210b is stopped and displayed, and the player is notified of the big role lottery result by the final stop display mode of the three effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c at this time.

FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining an example of the variation effect of the normal reach variation pattern according to the effect reference example. In the production reference example, the reach fluctuation pattern is roughly classified into a normal reach fluctuation pattern, a developed reach fluctuation pattern, and a pseudo-continuous reach fluctuation pattern. In the variation effect of the normal reach variation pattern, similar to the variation effect of the non-reach variation pattern, the variation display of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c is started along with the start of the variation display of the special symbols, and FIG. As shown, the effect symbol 210a is first stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 61(b), a performance symbol 210c identical to the performance symbol 210a is stop-displayed.

Thus, when the main effect display portion 200a displays the same effect symbols 210a and 210c in the stop-display ready-to-win state, as shown in FIG. "Reach" is displayed superimposed on 210a and 210c. A plurality of types of ready-to-win modes are provided, and the same performance symbols 210a and 210c marked with any of the numbers "1" to "9" are stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 61(d), the variable display is continued with the shapes of the effect symbols 210a and 210c different from those before the ready-to-win mode. Then, as shown in FIG. 61(e), finally, a performance symbol 210b different from the performance symbols 210a and 210c is stop-displayed, and the player is notified that the result of the big role lottery is a loss.

FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining an example of a variable performance of the developed reach variation pattern at the time of losing according to the performance reference example, and FIG. It is a figure explaining. As shown in FIGS. 62(a) to (d) and FIGS. 63(a) to (d), the variation effect of the developed reach variation pattern is similar to the variation effect of the normal reach variation pattern, in the main effect display section 200a, The effect symbols 210a and 210c are displayed in a ready-to-win state, and then a ready-to-win development effect is executed in which a predetermined developed image (moving image) is reproduced and displayed. In this reach development effect, for example, as shown in FIGS. As shown in f) and (g), an image for accomplishing the mission is displayed.

Here, the development images for the ready-to-win development production are roughly classified into a losing pattern and a big win pattern. In the development image of the losing pattern, as shown in FIG. After that, as shown in FIG. 62(i), performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are stop-displayed in a combination that notifies a failure. On the other hand, in the development image of the jackpot pattern, as shown in FIG. 63(h), an image showing the success of the mission is finally displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 210c is stop-displayed with a combination of notifying a big win.

In addition, as described above, the ready-to-reach development production includes, for example, a mission production in which an advanced image of the content of challenging the mission is displayed, and a battle production in which an advanced image of a friendly character and an enemy character fighting each other is displayed. It is The mission presentation is provided with a plurality of execution patterns with different mission contents, and the battle presentation is provided with a plurality of execution patterns with different appearing characters and fighting methods. Further, as described above, the execution pattern of the mission production is roughly divided into a big win pattern for achieving the mission and a losing pattern for failing the mission. It is roughly divided into a jackpot pattern in which a player wins against a player and a losing pattern in which a friendly character is defeated by an enemy character.

The big hit pattern and the losing pattern have the same contents until the final stage of the production, and differ in points such as whether the ally character wins or loses in the end, or whether the mission is accomplished. . Therefore, during the ready-to-win development production, the player cannot identify the result of the big role lottery until the final stage of the variable production, and the player is given an expectation of a big win.

The big win pattern is selected only when the result of the big win lottery is a big win, and the losing pattern is selected only when the result of the big win lottery is a loss. However, in one variable production, the reach development production may be executed twice, and in this case, the first reach development production is executed in a losing pattern, and the second reach development production is a losing pattern. Or run in a jackpot pattern. Below, the flow of the effect when the ready-to-win development effect is executed twice in one variable effect will be described.

FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining an example of a variable effect when the ready-to-win development effect according to the effect reference example is executed twice. For example, assume that the mission effects are executed as shown in FIGS. 64(a) and (b) after the effect symbols 210a and 210c are displayed in the ready-to-win mode. So far, there is no difference from the case where the reach development effect is executed only once in one variable effect, but immediately after being informed that the mission could not be achieved, as shown in FIG. , "REACH UP" is displayed on the main effect display section 200a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 64(d), the main effect display section 200a displays the development image for the battle effect, and the second ready-to-win development effect is started. The developed image for the battle production has a content in which an ally character and an enemy character fight each other, and when the jackpot is won, the ally character finally wins over the enemy character as shown in FIG. 64(e). , and as shown in FIG. 64(f), performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are stop-displayed in a combination that notifies a big win. On the other hand, in the event of a failure, as shown in FIG. 64(g), the ally character is finally defeated by the enemy character, and as shown in FIG. A stop display is displayed in combination.

FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation effect of a pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern according to the reference example of effect. As shown in FIG. 65(a), when the variable display of the production patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c is started, as shown in FIG. 65(b), the production patterns 210a, 210b and 210c are temporarily stopped and displayed in one of a plurality of preset pseudo modes. In this pseudo mode, for example, the same production patterns 210a and 210b and a production pattern 210c with a number "2" larger than these production patterns 210a and 210b are temporarily stopped and displayed.

When the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c are temporarily stopped and displayed in the pseudo mode, the variable display of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c is resumed as shown in FIG. 65(c). That is, it can be said that the pseudo mode shows the re-variation display of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c. After that, as shown in FIG. 65(d), the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are temporarily stopped and displayed again in a pseudo mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 65(e), when the variable display of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c is resumed, the performance symbols 210a and 210c are displayed in the ready-to-win mode, as shown in FIG. 65(f). After that, as shown in FIGS. 65(g) to (i), the reach development effect is executed in the same manner as the development reach variation pattern, and the player is informed of the result of the winning lottery.

Thus, the variation effect of the pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern is different from the variation effect of the development reach variation pattern until the production patterns 210a and 210c become the reach mode, and after becoming the reach mode, the development Variation production will proceed in the same manner as the reach variation pattern.

In the pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern, a plurality of variable display patterns of the production patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c until reaching the reach mode are provided, and the production patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are temporarily stopped for each fluctuation display pattern. The number of times of display, in other words, the number of variable display times of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are different. This variable display pattern is determined by a variable mode command. The selection ratio of the variation mode command at the time of winning the jackpot and at the time of losing is set so that the degree") is high.

Specifically, when the result of the big win lottery is a big hit, the selection ratio of the variable mode command with a large number of variable display times is set higher than the selection ratio of the variable mode command with a small number of variable display times, When the result of the big role lottery is a loss, the selection ratio of the variation mode command with a small number of variations display is set higher than the selection ratio of the variation mode command with a large number of variations display.

Further, in the main control board 300, the reliability of the pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern is set to be higher than the reliability of the developed reach variation pattern. Therefore, the reliability is suggested by the number of temporary stop displays (fluctuation displays) of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c, and the player is expected to see more temporary stop displays (variation displays) of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c. While expecting to be done, we will watch the whereabouts of the production.

The execution pattern of the variable performance described above is determined and executed by the sub control board 330 based on the variation command determined by the main control board 300 . That is, it can be said that the execution pattern of the variable effect is determined in cooperation with the main control board 300 and the sub control board 330 .

66A and 66B are diagrams for explaining the variable effect determination table according to the effect reference example, FIG. 66A shows the first half variable effect determination table, and FIG. 66B shows the second half variable effect determination table. As described above, when the main control board 300 conducts the big win lottery, variation commands are determined based on the results of the big win lottery, and each determined command is sent to the sub control board 330 . In the sub-control board 330, when receiving the variation mode command, it acquires a production random number of 1 from the range of 0 to 249, refers to the first half variation production determination table, and outputs the acquired production random number and the received variation mode command. Based on, the execution pattern of the variable performance in the first half is determined. In addition, when receiving the variation pattern command, it acquires a production random number of 1 from the range of 0 to 249, refers to the second half variation production determination table, and based on the acquired production random number and the received variation pattern command, The execution pattern of the variable performance in the second half is determined. In addition, in FIG. 66, only a part of the first half variable effect determination table and the second half variable effect determination table are extracted and shown.

As shown in FIG. 66, according to the first half variation performance determination table, the selection ratio for the execution pattern of the first half variation performance is set for each variation mode number (variation mode command), and according to the second half variation performance determination table For example, for each variation pattern number (variation pattern command), the selection ratio for the second half variation performance execution pattern is set. By combining and executing the execution patterns of the determined first half and second half of the variable performance, one variable performance is executed.

As for the variation effect of the reachless variation pattern, "none" indicating that the first half variation effect is not executed is determined as the first half execution pattern, and "normal loss 1" corresponding to the reachless variation pattern is determined as the second half execution pattern. , "Normal Loss 2", "Special Loss 1", and "Special Loss 2" are determined. For example, when receiving a variation mode command corresponding to a variation mode number of "01H" indicating that the first half variation performance is not executed, the sub control board 330 always determines "none" as the first half execution pattern. Also, at this time, in the fluctuation pattern command that can be received at the same time, only one of "normal loss 1", "normal loss 2", "special loss 1", and "special loss 2" is determined. A selection ratio is set in the variable effect determination table. Therefore, "none" is determined as the execution pattern in the first half, and "normal loss 1", "normal loss 2", "special loss 1", and "special loss 2" are determined as the execution pattern in the second half. The effect execution pattern is determined to be the non-reach variation pattern described above.

On the other hand, for the reach variation pattern variation effects, the first half of the execution pattern is determined to be anything other than "none", and the second half of the execution pattern is determined to be one of the reach development effects (indicated by developments 1 to 5 in the figure). is executed if In other words, in the main effect display section 200a, when the variation effect of the reach variation pattern is executed, the variation mode command corresponding to the variation mode number other than the variation mode number = 01H is always received, and the variation mode command is received. A variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number for which one of 1 to 5 is determined is received.

Here, in FIG. 66(a), "Normal reach 1", "Normal reach 2", etc. in the first half of the execution pattern, respectively, among the fluctuation effects of the normal reach fluctuation pattern, the production patterns 210a, 210b, 210c are in the reach mode. More specifically, it shows the changing display patterns of the background image and the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c displayed on the main effect display section 200a until the reach development effect is started. These image patterns are designed in advance to match the variable display time of the special symbol associated with the variable mode number, for example, when "normal reach 1" is determined, FIG. The image shown in (d) is displayed on the main effect display section 200a.

In addition, in FIG. 66(a), "pseudo 2a" and the like in the first half of the execution pattern are displayed on the main effect display section 200a until the reach development effect is started among the variable effects of the pseudo continuous reach variation pattern. This shows the display pattern of the main fluctuation effect image, that is, the execution pattern of the symbol display effect in which the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are variably displayed. For example, "pseudo 2a" is a pseudo continuous reach fluctuation pattern of "pseudo 2" in which the number of times of fluctuation display of the production patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c is two, and that the main fluctuation production image is the display pattern a. showing. In addition, "pseudo 3b" is a pseudo continuous reach fluctuation pattern of "pseudo 3" in which the number of times of fluctuation display of the production patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c is 3, and that the main fluctuation production image is the display pattern b. showing.

In addition, in the first half variation performance determination table and the second half variation performance determination table shown in FIG. 66, the variation performance of the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern is executed only when the result of the big role lottery is a loss. , the selection ratio is set. In addition, the development reach variation pattern and the pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern are determined both at the time of loss and at the time of the big hit, but the development reach variation pattern has a higher selection ratio at the time of loss than the pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern, and the jackpot The time selection ratio is set low. In this way, by setting the selection ratio at the time of losing and at the time of the big hit, the pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern is set with higher reliability than the development reach variation pattern.

Furthermore, among the pseudo continuous reach fluctuation patterns, the higher the number of times of simulation, the higher the selection ratio at the time of the big win, and the lower the selection ratio at the time of losing, and the more the number of times of simulation, the higher the reliability is done.

As described above, the rough flow of the variable performance is determined by the variable performance determination table. Execution availability and execution patterns are further determined. Here, the element effect is, for example, the variable display of the effect patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c in the main effect display section 200a, the development image displayed in the main effect display section 200a in the reach development effect, Furthermore, it refers to all effects that constitute variable effects, such as effects that move the effect accessory device 202 . In the embodiment, as an elemental effect that constitutes the variable effect, an advance notice effect (suggestive effect) is executed at various timings during the variable effect.

This notice effect is the start of the variable effect, the re-variation display of the effect patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c in the variable effect of the pseudo continuous reach variation pattern, and the main effect display section 200a during the reach development effect. It is an effect such as displaying a predetermined image at the time and moving the effect accessory device 202 at a predetermined timing, and whether or not it can be executed and an execution pattern are determined for each advance notice effect. A plurality of types of execution patterns are provided for each of the advance notice effects, and for each of the plurality of types of execution patterns, a selection ratio is set for each variation pattern command or variation mode command, in other words, for each whether or not a jackpot is won. An expected value is set for each execution pattern by the selection ratio.

As described above, in the sub-control board 330, when the variable command is received, the execution pattern of the variable performance, whether or not each element performance can be executed, and the execution pattern are determined, and the variable performance is executed during the variable display of the special symbols. The Rukoto. In this way, the variable performance is performed once for one time of variable display of the special symbols, but in the embodiment, the performance over multiple times of variable display of the special symbols is also performed.

FIG. 67 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pending display effect according to the effect reference example. A pending display area 211 is provided at the bottom of the main effect display section 200a. Although not shown in FIGS. 60 to 65, the holding display area 211 is always displayed on the main effect display section 200a during the variable effect and during the game standby. A suspension display effect is performed in the suspension display area 211 during the variable effect. In the pending display effect, the pending display 212a indicating the pending read out to the processing area (0th storage unit) at the time of the big role lottery, stored in the first to fourth storage units of the first special figure pending storage area A first pending display 212b, a second pending display 212c, a third pending display 212d, and a fourth pending display 212e are displayed in the pending display area 211, respectively, indicating the pending. In the following description, the pending display 212a and the first pending display 212b to the fourth pending display 212e are collectively referred to as the pending display 212. FIG.

For example, when the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner and four special 1 reserves are stored in the main RAM 300c, the reserve display 212a and the first reserve display are displayed as shown in FIG. A total of five pending displays 212 from 212b to a fourth pending display 212e are displayed in the pending display area 211. FIG. Then, from this state, the variable display of the special symbol ends, the special 1 reservation stored in the first memory is read out to the processing area (0th memory), and the big win lottery is performed, and the main RAM 300c. When the hold shift process is executed, as shown in FIG. 67(b), the hold display 212a is erased, and the first hold display 212b to the fourth hold display 212e are moved to the left by one. . Further, when the next special 1 suspension is read from this state, each suspension display 212 is further moved and displayed as shown in FIG. 67(c). In this way, the pending display effect is an effect of informing the player of the special 1 pending number stored in the main RAM 300c.

In addition, a plurality of display patterns are provided for the pending display 212, and the display colors are different for each display pattern. In the main control board 300, when the hold is stored, the effect determination process at the time of acquisition (step S536) is executed, and the change information determined when the newly stored hold is read out to the 0th storage unit. to the sub control board 330. In the sub control board 330, upon receiving the prefetch designation command, the display pattern of the hold display 212 corresponding to the newly stored hold is determined based on the received command. At this time, the selection ratio of each display pattern is set for each look-ahead designation command, that is, for each variation information determined when the newly stored hold is read out in the big role lottery. That is, since the selection ratio of each display pattern is set according to whether or not the jackpot is won and the execution pattern of the variable effect, the display pattern of the pending display 212 suggests the reliability (expected value) of the jackpot. It will happen.

FIG. 68(a) is a diagram for explaining the final pending display pattern determination table, and FIG. 68(b) is a diagram for explaining the previous pending display pattern determination table. As described above, in the effect determination process at the time of acquisition in the main control board 300, the pre-reading designation command indicating the variation mode number and the variation pattern number determined when the newly stored hold is read is sent to the sub control board 330 Send to That is, the prefetch designation command is a command to transmit to the sub control board 330 the variation mode number and variation pattern number determined when the suspension is read. According to the final pending display pattern determination table, the selection ratio of the display pattern of the pending display 212 is set for each prefetching designation command (variation pattern number). The display pattern, that is, the final display pattern of the pending display 212a is determined.

According to the final pending display pattern determination table shown in FIG. Rainbow)” is determined. Then, when the final display pattern of the pending display 212a is determined, the display pattern of the pending display 212 to be displayed before that is determined by referring to the previous pending display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 68(b). determined by According to this one-preceding pending display pattern determination table, the selection ratio of the display pattern of the pending display 212 to be displayed before the moving display is set for each display pattern of the pending display 212 .

For example, in the main control board 300, when the suspension is stored in the second storage unit of the first special figure suspension storage area, referring to the final suspension display pattern determination table, the final display pattern of the suspension display 212a is determined. In this case, next, the display pattern of the first pending display 212b is determined with reference to the previous pending display pattern determination table. At this time, the display pattern of the first pending display 212b is determined based on the final display pattern of the pending display 212a previously determined. For example, when the final display pattern of the pending display 212a is "blue", according to the previous pending display pattern determination table, the display pattern of the first pending display 212b is "flashing" at 200/250. , and "blue" is determined with a probability of 50/250.

After the display pattern of the first reserved display 212b is determined in this manner, the immediately previous reserved display pattern determination table is again based on the previously determined display pattern of the first reserved display 212b. The display pattern of the second pending display 212c is determined with reference to this.

As described above, when the hold is stored, first, the final display pattern of the hold display 212a is determined, and then, based on the determined final display pattern of the hold display 212a, the first hold The display patterns are sequentially determined such that the display pattern of the display 212b is determined, and the display order is reversed. According to the immediately preceding pending display pattern determination table, the selection ratio is set so that only the display pattern that is the same as the display pattern of the previously determined pending display 212 or has a low reliability is determined. It is

As described above, in the pending display effect, the pending display 212 is provided with a plurality of display patterns with different expected values for the provision of a predetermined game profit. The pending display 212 may be displayed in one display pattern from the time it is first displayed on the main effect display section 200a until it is finally erased, or the display pattern may change during the display period. sometimes.

In the production reference example, the timing at which the change in the display pattern of the hold display 212 occurs is that the newly stored special 1 hold (hereinafter also referred to as target hold) moves to the first hold display 212b to the third hold display 212d. It is roughly divided into the timing when the target is held and during the target change effect related to the target hold.

Next, the processing in the sub-control board 330 for executing the variable effect will be described. In addition, below, among the processes in the sub-control board 330, the description of the processes irrelevant to the variation effect will be omitted.

(Sub CPU initialization processing of sub control board 330)
FIG. 69 is a flow chart for explaining the sub-CPU initialization process (S1000) of the sub-control board 330 according to the production reference example.

(Step S1000-1)
When the power is turned on, the sub CPU 330a reads a CPU initialization processing program from the sub ROM 330b and initializes and sets flags stored in the sub RAM 330c.

(Step S1000-3)
Next, the sub CPU 330a performs processing for updating each effect random number, and thereafter repeatedly performs the processing of step S1000-3 until interrupt processing is performed. A plurality of types of effect random numbers are provided, and here, each effect random number is asynchronously updated.

(Sub-timer interrupt processing of sub-control board 330)
FIG. 70 is a flowchart for explaining the sub-timer interrupt processing (S1100) of the sub-control board 330 according to the production reference example. The sub-control board 330 is provided with a reset clock pulse generation circuit (not shown) that generates a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (30 times per second). When the reset clock pulse generating circuit generates a clock pulse, the sub CPU 330a reads the timer interrupt processing program and starts the sub timer interrupt processing.

(Step S1100-1)
The sub CPU 330a saves the register.

(Step S1100-3)
The sub CPU 330a performs processing for permitting interrupts.

(Step S1100-5)
The sub CPU 330 a updates various timer counters used in the sub control board 330 . Here, the various timer counters are decremented by 1 each time the sub-timer interrupt processing of the sub-control board 330 is executed, and the decrementation is stopped when it reaches 0, unless otherwise specified.

(Step S1200)
The sub CPU 330a analyzes the commands stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 330c and performs various processes according to the received commands. In the sub control board 330, when a command is transmitted from the main control board 300, command reception interrupt processing is performed, and the command transmitted from the main control board 300 is stored in the reception buffer. Here, the command stored in the reception buffer is analyzed by command reception interrupt processing.

(Step S1100-7)
The sub CPU 330a refers to the timetable and performs a time schedule management process for executing the process corresponding to the time stored in the timetable. Here, based on the time data set in the timetable, various flags are turned on and off, or by sending commands to each production device, various productions such as variable production and large role production It will control the execution of the production.

(Step S1100-9)
The sub CPU 330a restores the register and terminates the sub timer interrupt process.

FIG. 71 is a flow chart for explaining a read-ahead designation command reception process according to a reference example of effect executed when a read-ahead designation command is received in the command analysis process. As described above, the prefetching designation command (prefetching designation variation pattern command) is set in the main control board 300 in the effect determination process (steps S536-21, S536-25, and S536-27 in FIG. 33). After that, it is transmitted to the sub-control board 330 by sub-command transmission processing (step S100-65 in FIG. 23).

(Step S1210-1)
The sub CPU 330a first analyzes the received prefetch designation command.

(Step S1210-3)
Sub CPU 330a stores advance determination information based on the analysis result of step S1210-1. The sub-RAM 330c of the sub-control board 330 includes a first preliminary determination information storage unit corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage area of the main control board 300, and a second preliminary determination corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage area. An information storage unit is provided. The first prior determination information storage section has four storage sections, ie, a first storage section to a fourth storage section. The first to fourth storage units of these first advance determination information storage units correspond to the first to fourth storage units of the first special figure reservation storage area, respectively. Similarly, the second pre-determination information storage unit includes four storage units, the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, and the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the second pre-determination information storage unit are: It corresponds to each of the first to fourth storage units of the second special figure reservation storage area. Here, of the first to fourth storage units of the first special figure reservation storage area or the second special figure reservation storage area of the main control board 300, the storage unit corresponding to the storage unit in which the new suspension is stored pre-determination information is stored in.

(Step S1210-5)
The sub CPU 330 a performs final pending display pattern determination processing for determining the final display pattern of the pending display 212 . Here, based on the received prefetch designation command, the final pending display pattern determination table (FIG. 68(a)) is referred to determine and store the final display pattern of the pending display 212a.

(Step S1210-7)
The sub CPU 330a derives the number of times the display pattern of the pending display 212 is determined, that is, the change timing of the pending display 212, based on the storage unit in which the pending is stored. With reference to (FIG. 68(b)), the display pattern of the pending display 212 is determined. Then, the determined display pattern information of the pending display 212 is stored in a predetermined storage unit, and the process proceeds to step S1210-9.

(Step S1210-9)
Sub CPU 330a performs a hold display start process for starting the display of hold display 212 based on the determinations in steps S1210-5 and S1210-7, and ends the prefetch designation command reception process. Thus, when the hold is stored, the display of the corresponding hold display 212 is started.

FIG. 72 is a flow chart for explaining the variable command reception process executed when a variable command is received, among the command analysis processes according to the reference example of effect. As described above, the variation command is set in the special symbol variation number determination processing (steps S612-13 and S612-17 in FIG. 39) in the main control board 300, and then the sub-command transmission processing (step S100- in FIG. 23). 65) to the sub control board 330.

(Step S1220-1)
Upon receiving the variation command, the sub CPU 330a first analyzes and stores the received variation pattern command.

(Step S1220-3)
The sub CPU 330a acquires the effect random number (0 to 249) updated in step S1000-3, and based on the acquired effect random number and the analysis result in step S1220-1, determines the execution pattern of the second half of the variable effect. Decide, memorize.

(Step S1220-5)
Sub CPU 330a analyzes and stores the received variation mode command.

(Step S1220-7)
The sub CPU 330a acquires the effect random number (0 to 249) updated in step S1000-3, and based on the acquired effect random number and the analysis result in step S1220-5, determines the execution pattern of the first half of the variable effect. Decide, memorize.

(Step S1220-9)
The sub CPU 330a acquires the effect random number (0 to 249) updated in step S1000-3 for each advance notice effect, and based on the obtained effect random number and the analysis results in steps S1220-1 and S1220-5. , with reference to each notice effect determination table, the presence or absence of execution of each notice effect and the execution pattern are determined and stored.

(Step S1220-11)
Sub CPU 330a executes shift processing for shifting the prior determination information stored in the prior determination information storage unit. Here, when starting the variable production based on the special 1 suspension, the advance judgment information stored in the fourth storage unit to the second storage unit of the first advance judgment information storage unit, respectively, the first advance judgment information When shifting to the third storage unit to the first storage unit of the storage unit and starting the variable production based on the special 2 hold, the fourth storage unit to the second storage unit of the second advance determination information storage unit is stored. The pre-determination information stored therein is shifted to the third storage unit to the first storage unit of the second pre-determination information storage unit.

(Step S1220-13)
The sub CPU 330a performs a hold display shift process for moving the hold display 212 for display. Further, here, when the display pattern of the pending display 212 changes, execution data for changing the display pattern at a predetermined timing is set.

(Step S1220-15)
The sub CPU 330a sets the time data in the timetable based on the determinations made in the above steps, and terminates the variation command reception process. Based on the timetable set here, in step S1100-7, the process of displaying the image for the variable effect on the main effect display unit 200a, the sound output process, the lighting control process of the effect lighting device 204, etc. Production execution control is performed.

<Slot machine 400>
As shown in the external views of FIGS. 73 and 74, a slot machine 400 as a game machine includes a housing 402 with an open front surface and a front surface arranged vertically at one end of the front surface of the housing 402 so as to be rotatable. An upper door 404 and a lower front door 406 are provided. A colorless and transparent pattern display window 408 made of a glass plate, a transparent resin plate, or the like is provided at approximately the center of the lower portion of the front upper door 404. , three reels 410 (a left reel 410a, a middle reel 410b, and a right reel 410c) are independently rotatable. As shown in the pattern arrangement of FIG. 75(a), a plurality of types of symbols are arranged in each area divided into 20 on the outer peripheral surface of the left reel 410a, the middle reel 410b, and the right reel 410c. Through the symbol display window 408, the player can visually recognize a total of nine symbols, each of which is located in the upper, middle and lower stages, and which are three continuous reels 410a, 410b and 410c, respectively.

An operation unit installation table 412 is formed on the upper part of the front lower door 406, and the operation unit installation table 412 is provided with a medal insertion unit 414, a bet switch 416, a start switch 418, a stop switch 420, a production switch 422, and the like. there is The medal insertion unit 414 receives insertion of medals as game value through a medal insertion slot 414a. The bet switch 416 inserts (bets) a prescribed number of medals required for one game among the medals electrically stored (hereinafter simply referred to as credits) inside the slot machine 400 .

The start switch 418 is composed of, for example, a lever capable of detecting a tilting operation, and detects a game start operation by the player. The stop switch 420 (stop switch 420a, stop switch 420b, stop switch 420c) is provided corresponding to each of the left reel 410a, the middle reel 410b, and the right reel 410c, and detects the player's stop operation. In addition, when the stop switch 420 can be stopped, the player first stops any one of the stop switch 420a, the stop switch 420b, and the stop switch 420c, which is called a first stop. After that, stopping one of the two stop switches 420 that have not been stopped is called a second stop, and after the second stop, stopping the last remaining stop switch 420 is called a third stop. . The effect switch 422 is composed of, for example, a press switch and a jog dial switch rotatably arranged around it, and detects a player's press operation or rotation operation.

A liquid crystal display section 424 for displaying various images associated with the effects is provided in the upper approximate center of the front upper door 404 . In addition, on the upper part and on the left and right of the front upper door 404, there are provided lamps 426 for effect, which are made up of, for example, high-intensity light-emitting diodes (LEDs). Speakers 428 are provided at the left and right positions of the liquid crystal display section 424 on the rear surface of the upper front door 404 and at the left and right positions on the rear surface of the lower front door 406 to produce auditory effects such as sound effects and musical tones.

A main credit display section 430 and a main payout display section 432 are provided on the operating section installation table 412 . A sub-credit display section 434 and a sub-payout display section 436 are provided between the symbol display window 408 and the operating section installation table 412 . The main credit display portion 430 and the sub-credit display portion 434 display the number of credited medals (the number of credits), and the main payout display portion 432 and the sub-payout display portion 436 display the number of payout medals. .

Below the reel 410 in the housing 402, a medal payout device (medal hopper) 442 for paying out medals from the medal outlet 440a is provided. In addition, at the front lower portion of the front lower door 406, a saucer portion 440 for storing medals dispensed from the medal discharge port 440a is provided. A power switch 444 is also provided in the housing 402 . The power switch 444 is operated by an administrator who manages the slot machine 400 and is used to switch between two states, a power-off state and a power-on state.

In the housing 402, a main control board 500, which will be described later, is provided with setting keys and setting change switches (not shown) (collectively referred to as setting value setting means). In the slot machine 400, when a predetermined key (operation key) is inserted into the setting key and turned from the OFF position to the ON position, when the power is turned on through the power switch 444, the setting change mode is entered. , the setting value can be changed (simply referred to as setting change). The set value indicates the degree of advantage of the player (machine ratio) in stages, and is represented, for example, in six stages from 1 to 6. In general, the higher the value of the set value, the more advantageous the game as a whole. It is set to be high (expected acquisition number is high). The set value is incremented by one each time the setting change switch is pressed in a state in which the setting can be changed. Then, the setting value is determined, and the setting change mode is terminated by returning the setting key to the original position (OFF position), and the game becomes possible. It should be noted that setting change is possible only for a certain period of time after the power switch 444 is operated and the power is turned on.

In the slot machine 400, when a game can be started and a specified number of medals are betted, the activated line A is activated and the operation of the start switch 418 is activated. Here, bets are made by inserting credited medals through operation of the bet switch 416, inserting medals through the medal inserting unit 414, and replay combinations, which will be described later in detail, are displayed on the activated line A. This includes any case where medals are automatically inserted based on Also, the active line A is a line for judging the winning of a winning combination, and there is one in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 75(b), the activated line A has nine symbols (three reels×three rows of upper, middle, and lower) facing the symbol display window 408, the middle row of the left reel 410a, the middle row of the middle reel 410b, and the middle row of the middle reel 410b. The line is set to connect the positions corresponding to the symbols stopped on the upper stage of the right reel 410c. The invalid line is used to determine the winning combination by displaying other symbol combinations that make it easier to grasp the winning combination when it is difficult to grasp the winning combination only from the combination of symbols displayed on the valid line A. In this embodiment, five invalid lines B1, B2, B3, C1 and C2 shown in FIG. 75(b) are assumed.

When the player operates the start switch 418, the game is started, the left reel 410a, the middle reel 410b, and the right reel 410c are rotated, and the winning type lottery and the like are executed. After that, according to the operation of the stop switches 420a, 420b, 420c, the corresponding left reel 410a, middle reel 410b, and right reel 410c are respectively stopped. Then, when a winning combination that can receive medals wins according to the combination of the lottery results of the winning type lottery and the symbols displayed on the activated line A, the medals are paid out, and the winning type that can receive the medals is paid out. , or if the player wins but does not win, the left reel 410a, the middle reel 410b, and the right reel 410c all come to a stop, and the game ends.

In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned one game is the insertion of medals through the medal insertion unit 414, the insertion of credited medals through the operation of the bet switch 416, or the replay combination displayed on the activated line A. After one of the medals is automatically inserted based on the above, the left reel 410a, the middle reel 410b, and the right reel 410c are controlled to rotate according to the player's operation of the start switch 418, and the winning type lottery is executed. The left reel 410a, the middle reel 410b, and the right reel corresponding to the operated stop switches 420a, 420b, and 420c according to the lottery result of the winning type lottery and the operation of the plurality of stop switches 420a, 420b, and 420c by the player. 410c are respectively controlled to be stopped, and when a winning combination that can receive the payout of medals wins, the game is played until the payout of the medals is executed. In addition, when the winning type for which medals can be paid out is not won, or when the player wins but does not win, the left reel 410a, the middle reel 410b, and the right reel 410c all stop, and one game ends. However, the start of one game may be read as the operation of the start switch 418 by the player instead of the insertion of medals or the winning of a replay combination. Also, the number of times such one game is repeated is the number of games.

FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing a schematic electrical configuration of the slot machine 400. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 76, the slot machine 400 includes a main control board 500 (main control section) for controlling the progress of the game, and a sub-control board 502 (sub-control section) for controlling the effect according to the progress of the game. A control board is provided that includes. In addition, electrical signal transmission between the main control board 500 and the sub control board 502 is limited to one direction only from the main control board 500 to the sub control board 502 from the viewpoint of fraud prevention.

(Main control board 500)
The main control board 500 has a semiconductor integrated circuit including a main CPU 500a as a central processing unit, a main ROM 500b storing programs and the like, a main RAM 500c functioning as a work area, etc., and controls the entire slot machine 400. . The data in the main RAM 500c is retained without being erased even when the power is turned off, unless the setting is changed and the RAM is cleared.

In addition, the main control board 500 functions by the main CPU 500a cooperating with the main RAM 500c based on the program stored in the main ROM 500b. 606, determination means 608, payout control means 610, game state control means 612, effect state control means 614, command transmission means 616 and other functional units.

The main control board 500 receives various detection signals from an inserted medal detector 414b that detects the insertion of medals into the medal slot 414a, a bet switch 416, a start switch 418, and stop switches 420a, 420b, and 420c. The main CPU 500a executes various processes based on the received detection signal.

The initialization means 600 executes initialization processing in the main control board 500 . The betting means 602 bets medals to be used for games. Based on the operation of the start switch 418, the winning type lottery means 604 performs a winning type lottery for determining the suitability of the winning combination, more specifically, the suitability of the winning combination including the winning combination, as will be described in detail later.

The reel control means 606 controls the rotation of the left reel 410a, the middle reel 410b and the right reel 410c according to the operation of the start switch 418, corresponding to the rotating left reel 410a, the middle reel 410b and the right reel 410c. Depending on the operation of the stop switches 420a, 420b and 420c, the corresponding left reel 410a, middle reel 410b and right reel 410c are controlled to stop. In addition, the reel control means 606 activates the operation of the stop switches 420a, 420b, and 420c in the previous game in response to the operation of the start switch 418, and then, to display the lottery result of the winning type lottery. The time until the operation of the stop switches 420a, 420b, and 420c is validated (invalidated by the completion of the operation of the stop switches 420a, 420b, and 420c in the previous game) is extended beyond the specified time, and during that time, the reel 410a , 410b, and 410c are rotated in various ways (freeze effect). In the reel performance, an arbitrary switch that should be enabled is not enabled for a predetermined time, processing that should be executed is suspended for a predetermined time, or a signal of an arbitrary switch that should be transmitted and received is transmitted or received for a predetermined time. It can be realized by doing or not.

A reel drive control section 450 is also connected to the main control board 500 . This reel drive control unit 450 drives a stepping motor 452 based on the rotation start signal of the left reel 410a, the middle reel 410b, and the right reel 410c, which is transmitted from the reel control means 606 in response to the operation signal of the start switch 418. do. In addition, the reel drive control unit 450 detects the respective stop signals of the left reel 410a, the middle reel 410b, and the right reel 410c, which are transmitted from the reel control means 606, and the rotation position detection circuit 454 in response to the operation signal of the stop switch 420. Drive of the stepping motor 452 is stopped based on the signal.

The determining means 608 determines whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed on the activated line A. Here, the fact that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed on the activated line A may simply be called winning. A payout control means 610 pays out medals in the number (amount of value) corresponding to the winning combination based on the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination being displayed on the activated line A (winning). A medal payout device 442 is connected to the main control board 500, and the payout control means 610 discharges medals while counting the number of payout medals.

The game state control means 612 refers to the result of the winning type lottery and the determination result of the determination means 608, and shifts the game state to one of a plurality of types of game states. Also, the effect state control means 614 refers to the result of the winning type lottery, the determination result of the determination means 608, and the transition information of the game state, and shifts the effect state to one of a plurality of types of effect states.

The command transmission means 616 is a game-related command associated with the operation of the betting means 602, winning type lottery means 604, reel control means 606, determination means 608, payout control means 610, game state control means 612, effect state control means 614, and the like. are sequentially determined, and the determined commands are sequentially transmitted to the sub control board 502 .

Further, the main control board 500 is provided with a random number generator (random number generating means) 500d. The random number generator 500d sequentially increments the count value, loops within a predetermined numerical range, and extracts the count value at a predetermined point in time to obtain a random number. A random number generated by the random number generator 500d of the main control board 500 (hereinafter referred to as a winning type lottery random number) is used to determine the game profit to be given to the player, for example, the winning type lottery means 604 determines the winning type. .

(Sub control board 502)
The sub-control board 502, like the main control board 500, has various semiconductor integrated circuits including a sub-CPU 502a that is a central processing unit, a sub-ROM 502b that stores programs and the like, and a sub-RAM 502c that functions as a work area. , based on the command from the main control board 500, especially controls the performance. A backup power supply (not shown) is connected to the sub-RAM 502c as well as the main RAM 500c, so that data is retained without being erased even when the power is turned off. The sub control board 502 is also provided with a random number generator (random number generating means) 502d, similar to the main control board 500. It is used to determine the mode of production.

Also, in the sub-control board 502, the sub-CPU 502a functions by cooperating with the sub-RAM 502c based on the program stored in the sub-ROM 502b. It has a functional part.

The initialization determining means 630 executes initialization processing in the sub control board 502 . The command receiving means 632 receives commands from other control boards such as the main control board 500 and processes the commands. The effect control means 634 receives the detection signal from the effect switch 422, and determines the effect of the game performed by each device of the liquid crystal display unit 424, the speaker 428, and the effect lamp 426 based on the received command. Specifically, the effect control means 634 controls the image data displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 424, the effect lamps 426, the sub-credit display unit 434, the sub-payout display unit 436, and other illumination devices for effects. Along with determining the decoration data, the audio data constituting the audio to be output from the speaker 428 is also determined. And the production|presentation control means 634 performs the production|presentation of the determined game. Note that the production includes an auxiliary production. In the winning type lottery, when winning a selected winning type in which a correct combination (a specific combination) and an incorrect combination are duplicated, the correct operation of the stop switches 420a, 420b, and 420c, which is a winning condition for the correct combination, is performed. This is an effect for notifying the operation mode. With such an auxiliary effect, the player can easily display the symbol combination corresponding to the correct combination on the activated line A. An effect state in which such an assist effect is executed is called an AT (assist time) effect state. Also, a so-called ART game state may be used in which an AT effect state and an RT (replay time) game state with a high probability of winning a replay combination progress in parallel.

In the following description, information managed by a board other than the main control board 500, including the sub control board 502, such as the liquid crystal display section 424, the performance lamp 426, the speaker 428, the sub credit display section 434, and the sub payout display section 436 The means may be called other notification means. On the other hand, the notification means managed by the main control board 500, such as the main credit display section 430 and the main payout display section 432, may be called main notification means (instruction monitor). Also, the main notification means and other notification means capable of executing the auxiliary effect may be collectively referred to as the auxiliary effect execution means. The effect state control means 614 causes the auxiliary effect executing means to execute the auxiliary effect in the AT effect state.

(Table used in main control board 500)
FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the winning combination, and FIGS. 78 and 79 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the winning type lottery table.

As will be described later in detail, the slot machine 400 is provided with a plurality of types of game states and effect states, and the game states and effect states are changed in accordance with the progress of the game. In the main control board 500, the main ROM 500b stores a plurality of winning type lottery tables corresponding to the game states managed and controlled by the game state control means 612. FIG. The winning type lottery means 604 stores the corresponding winning type lottery table in the main ROM 500b according to the current set value (indicating the easiness of obtaining a game profit in stages) stored in the main RAM 500c and the current gaming state. and based on the extracted winning type lottery table, it is determined which winning type in the winning type lottery table the winning type lottery random number acquired in response to the operation signal of the start switch 418 corresponds to.

Here, the winning combination constituting the winning type extracted from the winning type lottery table includes a replay combination, a minor combination, and a bonus combination. The replay combination is a combination in which, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is displayed on the activated line A, the game can be played again without the player betting new medals. A small combination is a combination in which a predetermined number of medals can be paid out according to the symbol combination by displaying a symbol combination corresponding to the minor combination on the activated line A. In addition, the bonus combination is changed to a bonus game state (a game state during RBB operation to be described later), which is managed by the game state control means 612, by displaying a symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination on the activated line A. It is a role that can be transferred to

As shown in FIG. 77, the winning combination according to the present embodiment includes winning combinations "replay 1" to "replay 7" as replay combinations. In addition, as the small winning combination, winning combinations “small winning combination 1” to “small winning combination 39” are provided. In addition, a winning combination “RBB” is provided as a bonus combination. In FIG. 77, the left reel 410a, the middle reel 410b, and the right reel 410c are associated with one or a plurality of symbols forming each winning combination.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the stop switch 420 is operated by the player, if the symbols forming the symbol combination corresponding to the possible winning combination are on the effective line A, the reel control means By 606, stop control is performed so that the symbol is stopped on the activated line A. Further, when the stop switch 420 is operated, there are 4 symbols in the direction opposite to the rotating direction of the reel 410, although the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination that can be won are not on the activated line A. If it exists within the range (pull-in range) corresponding to the winning combination, the reel control means 606 makes the number of symbols that are separated become the number of sliding symbols, and the symbols that make up the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination are valid. Stop control is performed so as to stop after maintaining the rotation for the number of sliding frames so as to draw onto the line A. Further, when there are a plurality of symbols corresponding to winning combinations that can be won in the reel 410, and all of them are within the retraction range of the reel 410, which symbol is placed on the effective line A according to a predetermined priority. It is determined whether to pull it upward, and stop control is performed so as to stop after maintaining the rotation for the number of sliding frames so as to pull the prioritized symbol onto the effective line A. - 特許庁Incidentally, when the stop switch 420 is pressed, if a symbol constituting a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination other than a winable winning combination is present on the activated line A, the reel control means 606 controls the symbol. is not stopped on the effective line A, so-called kicking processing is also executed in parallel. In addition, as will be described later, when an operation mode (operation order or operation timing) is set as a winning condition for a winning combination included in the winning type, the reel control means 606 controls the winning combination according to the player's operation mode. The symbol combination corresponding to is controlled to be displayed on the activated line A.

Then, for example, symbols constituting symbol combinations corresponding to winning hands "replay 1" to "replay 4", winning hands "small hand 1" to "small hand 6", and "small hand 35" to "small hand 39". are arranged so that they can always be displayed on the effective line A by the above-described stop control on each reel 410 . Such a winning combination may be expressed as PB=1. On the other hand, for example, the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination “Replay 5” to “Replay 7”, the winning combination “Small combination 7” to “Small combination 34”, and the winning combination “RBB” are displayed on each reel 410. , the above-mentioned stop control does not always allow the arrangement to be displayed on the effective line A, so that a so-called dropout may occur. Such a winning combination may be expressed as PB≠1.

As shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, in the winning type lottery table, a plurality of winning areas are divided, and the winning type to be the target of the lottery differs depending on each game state, and the presence or absence of non-winning (losing) differs. or In FIGS. 78 and 79, the winning areas ( Winning type lottery tables corresponding to each of a plurality of gaming states are actually stored in the main ROM 500b. In addition, "◎" indicates that it is possible to draw a lottery to move to an advantageous section, and "○" indicates that it is impossible to draw a lottery to move to an advantageous section. It shows that it is a winning type.

In the winning type lottery table, each partitioned winning area is associated with a predetermined number (winning range value), which is a numerical value indicating a winning range, and a winning type. The total number of winning type lottery random numbers (65536) is obtained by summing up the numbers set in the winning areas. Therefore, the probability that each winning type is determined is a value obtained by dividing the number associated with the winning area by the total number of winning type lottery random numbers. A winning-type lottery means 604 sequentially acquires numbers from a plurality of winning regions in the winning-type lottery table in descending order of numbers based on the game state at that time, and converts the numbers to winning-type lottery random numbers. When the value after subtraction becomes less than 0, the winning type associated with the winning area at that time is taken as the lottery result of the winning type lottery. Also, the set numbers of all the winning areas of 1 or more winning areas are subtracted from the winning type lottery random number, and if the value after subtraction is 0 or more, the winning type "losing" of the winning area 0 is the winning type lottery. lottery result.

Here, the winning combination "RBB" constituting the winning type "RBB" will be supplemented. Predetermined Type 1 Special Accessory RB is an accessory that increases the number of combinations of symbols related to winning for each specified number, or increases the probability of operating the conditional device related to winning for each specified number. It is activated when the game is played, and can continue to operate until the result of the game is obtained not more than 12 times. Here, the conditional device is a device whose operation is a necessary condition for displaying a combination of symbols related to winning, replay, the operation of the accessory or the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, and the winning type lottery ( It means a winning flag that operates when winning a lottery by an electronic computer performed in a game machine. And the role product continuous operating device (winning role "RBB") related to the first type special role product constituting the winning type "RBB" is a device capable of continuously operating the first type special role product RB. It is activated when a specific combination of symbols is displayed, and ends when it is determined in advance.

According to the winning type lottery table of FIG. 78, for example, the winning area 0 is associated with the winning type "lost". No combination is displayed on the activated line A, and medals are not paid out. However, as will be described later, if the RBB internal winning flag is carried over to the next game, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "RBB" can be displayed on the activated line A by winning the winning type "lost". It becomes possible.

In addition, the winning area 1 is associated with the winning type "small winning combination ALL" in which the winning combinations "small winning combination 1" to "small winning combination 39" are duplicated, and the winning area 2 corresponds to the winning combination " The winning type "1 piece ALLA" in which the "small winning combination 11" to "small winning combination 39" are included in duplicate is associated with the winning area 3, and the winning combination "small winning combination 12" to "small winning combination 27" are associated with the winning area 3. The winning type "one card ALLB", which is redundantly included, is associated with it. In addition, the winning area 4 is associated with the winning type "choice 1 sheet 1" in which the winning combination "small combination 12" and "small combination 20" are duplicated, and the winning area 5 is associated with the winning combination "small combination Winning type "Choice 1 sheet 2" in which "Hand 13" and "Small win 21" are overlapped is associated, and winning area 6 is associated with winning combination "Small win 14" and "Small win 22". The winning type "choice 1 3" included in the winning area 7 is associated with the winning type "choice 1 4" in which the winning combination "small combination 15" and "small combination 23" are duplicated. are mapped. The winning area 8 is associated with the winning type "weak cherry" in which the winning combination "small combination 35" and "small combination 36" are duplicated, and the winning area 9 is associated with the winning combination "small combination 37". to "small win 39" are associated with the winning type "strong cherry", and the winning area 10 contains the winning wins "small win 7", "small win 8", and "small win 11". The winning type "watermelon A" that overlaps is associated, and the winning area 11 is associated with the winning type "watermelon B" that overlaps the winning combination "small combination 7" to "small combination 10". The winning area 12 is associated with the winning type "strong bell" in which the winning combinations "small combination 1", "small combination 3", and "small combination 5" are overlapped. In addition, the winning area 13 is associated with the winning type "common bell A" in which the winning hands "small hand 1" to "small hand 6" are overlapped, and the winning area 14 is associated with the winning hand "small hand 1” to “small winning combination 6” and “small winning combination 11” are included in duplicate, and are associated with the winning type “common bell B”.

In addition, in the winning areas 15 to 26, the correct combination (winning combination "small combination 1" to "small combination 6") with the number of payouts of 11 and the incorrect combination (winning combination "small combination") with the number of payouts of 1 Selected winning types (winning types "batting order bell 1A" to "batting order bell 6A", "batting order bell 1B" to "batting order bell 6B") that overlap with "hand 12" to "small win 34") are associated with each other. It is

Further, according to the winning type lottery table of FIG. 79, winning areas 27 to 39 include winning combinations "replay 1" to "replay 7" in duplicate. ”, and “symbol replay B1” to “symbol replay B6” are associated with each other. In addition, the winning area 40 is associated with the winning type "normal replay" in which the winning combination "replay 1" and "replay 2" are overlapped.

Further, the winning areas 41 to 46 are associated with the winning types "RBB1" to "RBB6" in which the winning combination "RBB" is included singly or overlapped with other minor combinations.

Then, when a winning type in which a plurality of winning hands are overlapped is won, a winning condition, such as stop The order in which the switches 420a, 420b, and 420c are operated is set.

In the following description, the operations of the stop switches 420a, 420b, and 420c that stop the reels in the order of the left reel 410a, the middle reel 410b, and the right reel 410c are referred to as "batting order 1". The operations of the stop switches 420a, 420b, and 420c that sequentially stop the reels are referred to as "batting order 2", and the operations of the stop switches 420a, 420b, and 420c that stop the reels in the order of the middle reel 410b, the left reel 410a, and the right reel 410c are referred to as the "batting order." 3", and the operation of the stop switches 420a, 420b, 420c for stopping the reels in the order of the middle reel 410b, the right reel 410c, and the left reel 410a is set as "hitting order 4", and the right reel 410c, the left reel 410a, and the middle reel 410b are operated in this order. The operation of the stop switches 420a, 420b, and 420c for stopping the reels is referred to as "batting order 5", and the operation of the stop switches 420a, 420b, and 420c for stopping the reels in the order of the right reel 410c, middle reel 410b, and left reel 410a is referred to as "batting order 6". ”.

For example, in the non-internal game state, if the winning type "batting order bell 1A" in the winning area 15 is won and an operation is performed according to the correct operation mode (batting order 1), the payout number is 11, which is the correct winning combination. Stop control is performed so that the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 1" is preferentially displayed on the activated line A. - 特許庁Further, when the operation of the batting order 2 is performed, the stop control is performed so that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "small combination 28" which is the incorrect combination with the number of payouts of 1 is preferentially displayed on the activated line A. is performed, and when the operation according to the batting order 3, 4 is performed, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "small combination 12", which is an incorrect combination of the number of payouts of 1, is preferentially placed on the activated line A by 1/4. Stop control is performed so as to be displayed with a probability, and when operations are performed according to the batting order of 5 and 6, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "small combination 16", which is an incorrect combination of the number of payouts of 1, is on the valid line A. Stop control is performed so that it is preferentially displayed on the top with a probability of 1/4.

It should be noted that the winning probability (set number) of each winning type in the winning areas 15 to 26 is set to be equal. Since the player usually cannot know which type of winning has been won, by providing the above-described winning areas 15 to 26, it is made difficult for the correct combination to win. Further, as described above, even if the stop switches 420a, 420b, and 420c are operated in the batting order in which the incorrect combination is preferentially displayed, the symbol combination corresponding to the incorrect combination is necessarily displayed on the activated line A. However, depending on the mode of operation, there are cases where a failure occurs (PB≠1).

When one of the winning types described above is won, the internal winning flag corresponding to each winning type is established (ON), and each reel 410 is controlled to stop according to the state of establishment of this internal winning flag. The Rukoto. At this time, if a winning type including a minor winning combination is won, but the symbol combination corresponding to these winning combinations cannot be displayed on the activated line A in the game, after the end of the game. The internal winning flag is turned off. In other words, the right to win a minor winning combination is limited only within the game in which the winning type including the minor winning combination has been won, and the right cannot be carried over to the next game. On the other hand, if the winning type including the winning combination "RBB" is won, the RBB internal winning flag is established (ON) and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "RBB" is displayed on the activated line A. The RBB internal winning flag is carried over across games until it is displayed. In addition, when the internal winning flag corresponding to the winning type including the replay combination is established, the symbol combination corresponding to any of the replay combinations included in the winning type is always on the activated line A. After the display is performed and the processing required to play the next game without medals is performed, the internal winning flag is turned OFF.

(Transition of game state)
Here, the game state transition will be described with reference to FIG. Here, a plurality of game states such as a non-internal game state, an RBB internal game state, and an RBB active game state are prepared. Each game state is changed according to winning of a bonus combination, winning (activation), and termination, as described later.

The non-internal game state is a game state corresponding to an initial state in a plurality of game states. In such a non-internal game state, the winning probability of the replay combination is set to about 1/7.3. In addition, in the non-internal game state, the winning combination "RBB" is determined with a predetermined probability (for example, approximately 1/30).

The game state control means 612 changes the game state according to winning of the winning combination “RBB”. For example, in a game in which the winning combination "RBB" is won, when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "RBB" is displayed on the activated line A, the game state control means 612 changes the game state to the RBB active game state. Migrate (1).

In the RBB active gaming state, the probability of winning the replay combination is set to zero. In the gaming state during the RBB operation, the winning types that can be won are the winning type "small hand ALL" in the winning area 1, and the winning types "1 card ALLA" and "1 card ALLB" in the winning areas 2 and 3. is set. When the winning type ``small hand ALL'' is won, the symbol combination corresponding to any of the winning hand ``small hand 1'' to ``small hand 39'' is displayed on the effective line A, and the winning type ``1 card ALL'' is won. Then, stop control is performed so that the symbol combination corresponding to any one of the winning combination “small combination 11” to “small combination 39” is displayed on the activated line A. Here, the expected winning number per unit game in the RBB-activated game state is lowered by such a configuration of the small combination.

When the conditions for ending the RBB-activated gaming state are met, that is, when the acquired number reaches a predetermined number, the gaming state control means 612 shifts the gaming state to the non-internal gaming state (2).

On the other hand, in the game in which the winning combination "RBB" is won, if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "RBB" cannot be displayed on the activated line A, the game state control means 612 changes the game state to the inside of the RBB. Transition to a middle game state (special game state) (3).

In the RBB internal gaming state, the winning probability of the replay combination is set to about 1/5.9. In addition, in the RBB internal gaming state, the winning type "loss" is not won. In other words, when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning hand "RBB" cannot be displayed on the activated line A in the winning game of the winning hand "RBB", after that, the winning hand "RBB" is replaced by a smaller combination or a smaller combination. Since the replay combination is preferentially stopped on the activated line A, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "RBB" cannot be displayed on the activated line A. - 特許庁Therefore, once the gaming state shifts to the RBB inside gaming state, the RBB inside gaming state is maintained without transition of the gaming state thereafter. Here, while maintaining the RBB inside game state, the AT effect state is realized in the RBB inside game state.

Here, in the RBB internal middle game state, since a plurality of types of correct hands are won without overlapping each other, the chances of winning the correct hands can be increased. By performing the auxiliary performance in the AT performance state in the state, it is possible to easily obtain medals. On the other hand, in the game state during RBB operation, since a plurality of types of correct hands are won in duplicate, there are few opportunities for winning the correct hands, so the correct hands are awarded more than in the AT presentation state in other game states. This reduces the number of chances that a player can play, which makes it difficult for a player to increase the number of medals he or she owns. Therefore, while providing the function of the RBB operating game state that the probability of winning a winning combination is higher than that of the RBB inside game state, the RBB operating game state is equivalent to the RBB inside game state in terms of medal acquisition performance. A specification (acceleration RBB) of being inferior can be realized.

(Transition of production state)
FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the transition of the effect state. Hereinafter, the effect state (non-AT effect state, AT effect state) to be changed by the effect state control means 614 in the main control board 500 will be described in detail. In addition, below, the case where the game state is the RBB inside game state will be described.

Here, in order to comprehensively and uniformly determine whether or not the game state with high medal acquisition performance is biased, the game section having the performance related to the instruction function, that is, the auxiliary performance (instruction function) is executed. A game section that is advantageous to the player, including a game section, is defined as an advantageous section (specific section). In the advantageous section, as a result of performing a lottery related to the operation of the auxiliary effect on the main control board 500, when the auxiliary effect is activated, the main control board 500 can identify the content of the instruction, for example, the main notification This is a game section in which instruction information may be transmitted to peripheral boards such as the sub-control board 502 only when it is displayed on the means. A game section different from the advantageous section is defined as a non-advantageous section. Therefore, a plurality of production states (non-AT production state, AT production state) belong to either the advantageous section or the non-advantageous section which are game sections. In this embodiment, almost all production states belong to the advantageous section, and the non-advantageous section is realized in a part of the non-AT production state (here, the non-advantageous production state).

In the advantageous section, among the winning modes in which the correct role is lost if there is no assistance effect, in the selected winning type in which the payout for the correct role is the maximum (here, 11), the assistance that assists the winning of the correct role When an effect (auxiliary effect for obtaining the maximum number of coins to be paid out) is performed, for example, the section indicator 460 must be turned on to notify that effect.

In addition, in the non-advantageous section, it is possible to change the winning probability of the winning type for each set value, but the probability of determining the transition to the effect state (AT effect state) accompanied by the auxiliary effect in the same winning type must not be different for each set value. On the other hand, in the advantageous section, the winning probability of the winning type and the probability of determining the transition (or addition) to the production state (AT production state) with the auxiliary production in the same winning type are different for each set value. It is possible to

Therefore, the production state control means 614 manages the transition between the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section in addition to managing the transition of the production state. In addition, regardless of such management, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by satisfying the following termination conditions. For example, the value counted in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined value (for example, the number of staying games (the number of game executions) reaches 1500 games, or the number of acquired sheets (net increase number) exceeds 2400) to force quit. In either case, the effect state control means 614 resets all the information updated in the advantageous section (all variables affecting the performance related to the instruction function) by shifting from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section. .

(Non-AT production state, AT production state)
In the non-AT production state, the execution frequency of the auxiliary production is much lower than in the AT production state, and the auxiliary production is almost not performed, so the number of medals that can be obtained is limited. Here, six performance states such as a normal performance state, a non-advantageous performance state, a preparation performance state, a first interval performance state, a continuous lottery performance state, and a second interval performance state are provided as non-AT performance states.

In the AT performance state, it is possible to obtain a large number of medals while suppressing the consumption of medals by causing the assistance performance executing means to execute the assistance performance when all the selected winning types are won. Therefore, by shifting to the AT effect state, the player can progress the game more advantageously than in the non-AT effect state. Here, a pseudo bonus effect state is provided as the AT effect state. Each effect state (normal effect state, pseudo-bonus effect state, non-advantageous effect state, preparation effect state, first interval effect state, continuous lottery effect state, second interval effect state) will be individually described below.

(Each production state)
The normal rendering state is a rendering state corresponding to the initial state among a plurality of rendering states. The production state control means 614 performs AT lottery in the normal production state. The AT lottery is a lottery for determining transition to the AT performance state, and the performance state control means 614 performs the AT lottery with different probabilities for each winning type determined by the winning type lottery. Then, when the AT lottery is won, the performance state control means 614 shifts the performance state to the pseudo bonus performance state which is the AT performance state after the predetermined number of precursor games has passed (1). Further, when a predetermined ceiling condition (for example, a predetermined number of games are played continuously in the normal production state) is satisfied in the normal production state without transitioning to the pseudo-bonus production state (so-called ceiling reached), the production state control means 614 shifts the production state to a pseudo-bonus production state (1).

In the pseudo-bonus effect state, an auxiliary effect is executed until a predetermined end condition (for example, the number of games played reaches a predetermined number of games) is satisfied, and the player can, for example, expect to win in the pseudo-bonus effect state. A number of 3.5 sheets can be obtained. Incidentally, in the pseudo bonus effect state, mainly two end conditions are prepared. For example, if the end condition is that the number of games played reaches the predetermined number of games, two levels of 30 and 80 are provided as the predetermined number of games, and either one is determined by lottery. In the pseudo-bonus effect state, the player naturally obtains more game profits as the number of games played increases. Therefore, the player would want the predetermined number of games to be 80, not 30. However, even if 30 is determined as the predetermined number of games, a promotion lottery is also performed to increase the predetermined number of games of the auxiliary effect from 30 to 80 during the completion of the predetermined number of games. Here, as an example of the termination condition of the pseudo-bonus effect state, the number of games played has reached the predetermined number of games. Reaching a certain number or reaching a predetermined number of acquired sheets (net increased number of sheets) may be employed.

Then, when a predetermined end condition is satisfied in the pseudo-bonus effect state, the effect state control means 614 may shift the effect state to a non-advantageous effect state (2). At this time, the effect state control means 614 temporarily shifts the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section, and resets all the information updated in the advantageous section. For example, if the preceding pseudo-bonus effect state is the initial pseudo-bonus effect state, that is, if it is the pseudo-bonus effect state immediately after shifting from the normal effect state, the effect state control means 614 changes the effect state to a non-advantageous state. While shifting to the performance state, the advantageous section is temporarily shifted to the non-advantageous section. In addition, even if the pseudo-bonus effect state in the previous stage is the pseudo-bonus effect state of the multiples of 3 (3, 6, . . . ) that does not go through the normal effect state, , shifts to a non-advantageous section, and temporarily shifts the advantageous section to a non-advantageous section.

Then, the effect state control means 614 draws a lottery for the transition to the advantageous section with a high probability (for example, 1/2), returns to the advantageous section after playing a few games, and shifts the effect state to the preparation effect state ( 3). This is to avoid the pseudo-bonus effect state from being forcibly terminated when the value counted in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined value.

On the other hand, if the pseudo-bonus effect state in the preceding stage is not the first time, or if it is not the pseudo-bonus effect state of the multiple times of 3 that does not pass through the normal effect state, the effect state control means 614 shifts the effect state to the non-advantageous effect state. (4). This is to prevent the pseudo-bonus effect state from being forcibly terminated when the value counted in the advantageous interval reaches a predetermined value, and to prevent the advantageous interval from ending unnecessarily.

In the preparation production state, the production state control means 614 draws a lottery for transition to the first interval production state with a high probability (for example, 1/2), and based on the determination of the transition to the first interval production state, the production state is changed. to the first interval effect state (5).

The first interval effect state continues until a predetermined end condition (for example, completion of 40 games) is satisfied, during which a continuation lottery for the pseudo-bonus effect state is executed. Unlike the pseudo-bonus effect state, the first interval effect state is different from the pseudo-bonus effect state in that the number of expected wins per unit game is small and may have a negative value. In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect state is set to always be the first interval effect state when the advantageous section is won in the non-advantageous section. Therefore, after the pseudo-bonus effect state ends, even if the advantageous section continues, or if the transition to the non-advantageous section is made once as described above, the transition to the first interval effect state is made. becomes. Then, when a predetermined termination condition in the first interval effect state is satisfied, the effect state control means 614 shifts the effect state to the continuous lottery effect state (6).

The continuous lottery effect state continues until a predetermined termination condition (for example, completion of 5 games) is satisfied, and finally, the result of the continuous lottery of the pseudo-bonus effect state in the first interval effect state is reported. Unlike the pseudo-bonus effect state, the expected winning number per unit game is small in such a continuous lottery effect state, and the value may be negative. In the first interval effect state, if the transition (continuation) to the pseudo-bonus effect state is determined, the effect state control means 614 shifts the effect state to the pseudo-bonus effect state (7), and the pseudo-bonus effect state. , the production state control means 614 returns the production state to the normal production state (8).

As described above, in the present embodiment, once the pseudo bonus effect state is entered, the pseudo bonus effect state→preparation effect state→first interval effect state→continuous lottery effect state, unless the continuous lottery of the continuous lottery effect state is missed. By repeating the transition of , the player can accumulate medals.

In addition, in the preparation production state, the production state control means 614 performs a lottery for the transition to the second interval production state in addition to the lottery for the transition to the first interval production state. However, the probability of transition to the second interval effect state (eg, 1/20) is set smaller than the probability of transition to the first interval effect state (eg, 1/2). In the preparation production state, when the transition to the second interval production state is determined before the transition to the first interval production state is determined, the production state control means 614 determines the transition to the second interval production state. Based on (9), the production state is shifted to the second interval production state. Here, an example is given in which the lottery for transition to the second interval effect state is performed in the preparatory effect state, but similarly, the lottery for transition to the second interval effect state may be performed in the non-advantageous effect state.

Like the first interval effect state, the second interval effect state continues until a predetermined end condition (for example, completion of 40 games) is satisfied, during which a continuation lottery for the pseudo-bonus effect state is executed. Like the first interval effect state, the second interval effect state differs from the pseudo bonus effect state in that the number of expected wins per unit game is small and may have a negative value.

However, in the second interval effect state, the pseudo bonus effect state is determined with a higher probability than in the first interval effect state. For example, in the first interval effect state, the pseudo-bonus effect state is determined at 1/58 every game for 40 games (winning probability 50%), and in the second interval effect state, the pseudo-bonus effect state is determined for 40 games. is determined at every game 1/25 (winning probability 80%). Then, when a predetermined termination condition is satisfied, the effect state control means 614 shifts the effect state to the continuous lottery effect state (10). Once the transition to the second interval effect state is determined, after that, there is no transition to the non-advantageous effect state, the preparation effect state, or the first interval effect state until the continuous lottery effect state is entered. From the pseudo-bonus effect state, only the second interval effect state is entered (11). Therefore, the player can always receive a continuous lottery with a high probability. Further, once the transition to the second interval effect state is determined, even if the transition to the pseudo bonus effect state is not determined in the continuous lottery effect state, the effect state control means 614 immediately changes the effect state. The state is shifted to a non-advantageous performance state without returning to the normal performance state (12). Therefore, when the transition to the pseudo-bonus effect state is not determined in the continuous lottery effect state, the pseudo-bonus effect state→preparation effect state→first interval effect state→continuation until the continuous lottery of the continuous lottery effect state fails again. The transition of the lottery effect state can be repeated. In this way, once the state is shifted to the second interval effect state, the transition from the pseudo bonus effect state→the second interval effect state→continuous lottery effect state can be repeated with high probability, and furthermore, the pseudo bonus effect state→the second interval effect state→continuous lottery effect state can be repeated with a high probability. Even if the transition to the bonus performance state is not determined, at least, the transition from the pseudo bonus performance state→preparation performance state→first interval performance state→continuous lottery performance state can be repeated again, so that the player can play more games. medals can be accumulated. That is, it can be said that the second interval effect state is more advantageous than the first interval effect state.

Further, as described above, the effect state control means 614, when shifting from the pseudo-bonus effect state to the second interval effect state, can shift to the non-advantageous section unlike the transition to the first interval effect state. do not have. In the present embodiment, when the pseudo-bonus effect state is the initial pseudo-bonus effect state, the effect state control means 614 does not shift to the second interval effect state, and temporarily changes the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section. , and be sure to shift to the first interval performance state. Then, the advantageous section is reset once. Therefore, even if the advantageous section is not reset when shifting to the second interval presentation state, the pseudo-bonus presentation state passing through the second interval presentation state will not be terminated in a short period of time due to the limitation of the advantageous section, and the player will be able to A lot of medals can be obtained by a loop of pseudo bonus effect state→second interval effect state→continuous lottery effect state.

Specific processing in the main control board 500 and the sub-control board 502 will be described below with reference to flowcharts.

(CPU initialization processing of main control board 500)
FIG. 82 is a flow chart for explaining CPU initialization processing in the main control board 500 . When power is supplied from the power board, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 500a, and the main CPU 500a performs the following CPU initialization processing (S2000).

(Step S2000-1)
When the power is turned on, the main CPU 500a reads a startup program from the main ROM 500b as an initial setting process, and performs setting processes necessary for executing various processes.

(Step S2000-3)
The main CPU 500a sets the wait processing time in the timer counter.

(Step S2000-5)
The main CPU 500a determines whether a power-off warning signal is detected. A power interruption detection circuit is provided in the main control board 500, and when the power supply voltage drops below a predetermined value, a power interruption warning signal is output from the power interruption detection circuit. If the power-off notice signal is detected, the process proceeds to step S2000-3, and if the power-off notice signal is not detected, the process proceeds to step S2000-7.

(Step S2000-7)
The main CPU 500a determines whether or not the wait processing time set in step S2000-3 has elapsed. As a result, if it is determined that the wait processing time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2000-9, and if it is determined that the wait time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2000-5.

(Step S2000-9)
The main CPU 500a executes necessary processing to permit access to the main RAM 500c.

(Step S2000-11)
The main CPU 500a executes checksum confirmation processing. Here, the main CPU 500a calculates the checksum and determines whether the calculated checksum does not match the checksum saved at the time of power failure (abnormality) and whether the backup is abnormal. If the main CPU 500a determines that either one or both of the backup and the checksum are abnormal, the main CPU 500a turns on the backup abnormality flag. Turn off.

(Step S2000-13)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the backup abnormality flag is on. As a result, when it is determined that the backup abnormality flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2010, and when it is determined that the backup abnormality flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S2020.

(Step S2010)
The main CPU 500a executes cold start processing. This cold start processing will be described later.

(Step S2020)
The main CPU 500a executes setting value switching processing for switching setting values. This set value switching process will be described later.

(Step S2030)
The main CPU 500a executes a state recovery process for returning to the state immediately before the power was turned off. This state return processing will be described later.

FIG. 83 is a flow chart for explaining cold start processing (S2010) in the main control board 500. FIG.

(Step S2010-1)
The main CPU 500a clears the used area in the main RAM 500c and executes used area RAM check processing for detecting an abnormality in the used area.

(Step S2010-3)
The main CPU 500a clears another area (unused area) in the main RAM 500c and executes another area RAM check process for detecting an abnormality in the other area. If an abnormality is detected in another area in the separate area RAM check process, the main CPU 500a turns on the RAM read/write error flag.

(Step S2010-5)
The main CPU 500a sets an error code "EA" indicating an abnormality in the main RAM 500c.

(Step S2010-7)
The main CPU 500a determines whether an abnormality has been detected in step S2010-1. As a result, if it is determined that an abnormality has been detected in step S2010-1, the process proceeds to step S2011, and if it is determined that an abnormality has not been detected in step S2010-1, the process proceeds to step S2010-9. transfer processing.

(Step S2010-9)
The main CPU 500a acquires a RAM read/write error flag that is turned on when an abnormality is detected in step S2010-3.

(Step S2010-11)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the RAM read/write error flag is on. As a result, when it is determined that the RAM read/write error flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2011, and when it is determined that the RAM read/write error flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S2020.

(Step S2020)
The main CPU 500a executes setting value switching processing for switching setting values. This set value switching process will be described later.

(Step S2010-13)
The main CPU 500a sets an error code "E7" indicating a backup error.

(Step S2011)
The main CPU 500a executes error stop processing for stopping the progress of the game due to an error. This error stop processing will be described later.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart for explaining the error stop processing (S2011) in the main control board 500. FIG.

(Step S2011-1)
The main CPU 500a sets the initial stack pointer value as the address of the stack pointer.

(Step S2011-3)
The main CPU 500a executes error setting processing for setting error display and warning sound.

(Step S2011-5)
The main CPU 500a sets the external signal 1-3 output bit off to turn off the output image of the bit corresponding to the external signal 1-3.

(Step S2011-7)
The main CPU 500a executes output port image setting processing for updating the output image for the bit set in step S2011-5.

(Step S2011-9)
The main CPU 500a shifts to an endless loop. As a result, the progress of the game is stopped.

FIG. 85 is a flowchart for explaining the setting value switching process (S2020) in the main control board 500. FIG.

(Step S2020-1)
The main CPU 500a acquires the signal of the input port 1, and determines whether or not the setting value switching condition is satisfied based on the acquired signal of the input port 1. FIG. As a result, if it is determined that the set value switching condition is not satisfied, the set value switching process is terminated, and if it is determined that the set value switching condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2020-3. . Here, the signal of the input port 1 includes a signal indicating whether or not the front upper door 404 and the front lower door 406 are open, and a signal indicating whether or not the setting key is turned on. Here, when a signal indicating that the front upper door 404 and the front lower door 406 are open and a signal indicating that the setting key is turned on are obtained, the setting value switching condition is established. It is determined that

(Step S2020-3)
The main CPU 500a executes a RAM clearing process for clearing a used area to be cleared when changing settings in the main RAM 500c.

(Step S2020-5)
The main CPU 500a executes a table content setting process for transferring the table data of the setting value switching time data table to the main RAM 500c.

(Step S2020-7)
The main CPU 500a sets, in the transmission buffer, a setting change start command indicating to start changing setting values.

(Step S2020-9)
The main CPU 500a executes edge check processing for detecting the rising edge (ON edge) and falling edge (OFF edge) of the signal of the input port.

(Step S2020-11)
The main CPU 500a acquires setting value data indicating the current setting value.

(Step S2020-13)
The main CPU 500a determines whether or not the ON edge of the setting change switch is detected in step S2020-9. As a result, if it is determined that the ON edge of the setting change switch has not been detected, the process proceeds to step S2020-17, and if it is determined that the ON edge of the setting change switch has been detected, the process proceeds to step S2020-15. .

(Step S2020-15)
The main CPU 500a increments the set value data by one.

(Step S2020-17)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the set value data is within the range (1 to 6) that can be set as the set value. As a result, if it is determined that the set value data is within the range, the process moves to step S2020-21, and if it is determined that the set value data is not within the range, the process moves to step S2020-19.

(Step S2020-19)
The main CPU 500a sets the set value data to zero.

(Step S2020-21)
The main CPU 500a updates the set value data to the value incremented or set in step S2020-15 or step S2020-19.

(Step S2020-23)
The main CPU 500 a executes display data conversion processing for displaying the set value on the main credit display section 430 .

(Step S2020-25)
The main CPU 500a determines whether or not the ON edge of the setting change switch is detected. As a result, if it is determined that the ON edge of the setting change switch has not been detected, the process proceeds to step S2020-31, and if it is determined that the ON edge of the setting change switch has been detected, the process proceeds to step S2020-27. to move.

(Step S2020-27)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the setting change switch is on. As a result, when it is determined that the setting change switch is on, the process proceeds to step S2020-27, and when it is determined that the setting change switch is not on, the process proceeds to step S2020-29.

(Step S2020-29)
The main CPU 500a sets a setting change switch interval timer.

(Step S2020-31)
The main CPU 500a executes timer wait processing to wait until the setting change switch interval timer reaches zero.

(Step S2020-33)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the ON edge of the start switch 418 is detected. As a result, if it is determined that the ON edge of the start switch 418 has not been detected, the process proceeds to step S2020-9, and if it is determined that the ON edge of the start switch 418 has been detected, the process proceeds to step S2020-35. to move.

(Step S2020-35)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the setting key is off. As a result, if it is determined that the setting key is off, the process proceeds to step S2020-35, and if it is determined that the setting key is not off, the process proceeds to step S2020-37.

(Step S2020-37)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the setting key is on. As a result, if it is determined that the setting key is on, the process proceeds to step S2020-37, and if it is determined that the setting key is not on, the process proceeds to step S2021.

(Step S2021)
The main CPU 500a executes initialization start processing for starting initialization. This initialization start process will be described later.

FIG. 86 is a flow chart for explaining the initialization start process (S2021) in the main control board 500. FIG.

(Step S2021-1)
The main CPU 500a sets, in the transmission buffer, a setting change end command indicating that the change of the setting value has been completed.

(Step S2021-3)
The main CPU 500a sets a setting change state command indicating the state when the change of the setting value is completed in the transmission buffer.

(Step S2021-5)
The main CPU 500a sets a wait timer at the start of initialization.

(Step S2021-7)
The main CPU 500a executes a timer wait process of waiting until the wait timer reaches 0 at the start of initialization.

(Step S2021-9)
The main CPU 500a executes RAM clear processing at the time of setting change to clear another area of the main RAM 500c.

(Step S2021-11)
The main CPU 500a executes a RAM clearing process for clearing a used area to be cleared when changing settings in the main RAM 500c.

(Step S2021-13)
The main CPU 500a sets a game state command indicating the current game state in the transmission buffer.

(Step S2100)
The main CPU 500a executes a game start process for starting a game. Note that this game start processing will be described later.

FIG. 87 is a flow chart for explaining the state return processing (S2030) in the main control board 500. FIG.

(Step S2030-1)
The main CPU 500a restores the stack pointer.

(Step S2030-3)
The main CPU 500a executes unused area clearing processing for clearing unused areas in the main RAM 500c.

(Step S2030-5)
The main CPU 500a clears the stack pointer save buffer.

(Step S2030-7)
The main CPU 500a sets (turns on) the post-power-off recovery flag.

(Step S2030-9)
The main CPU 500a executes port input processing for updating the image of the input port.

(Step S2030-11)
The main CPU 500a executes operation target bit extraction processing for extracting information on the operation target bit based on the image of the input port updated in step S2030-9.

(Step S2030-13)
The main CPU 500a sets the operation target bit extracted in step S2030-11 as the operation target bit of the previous state.

(Step S2030-15)
The main CPU 500a acquires the motor phases of the reels 410a, 410b, and 410c. Here, motor phases are set as the states of the reels 410a, 410b, and 410c. The motor phase indicates the operating state of the reels 410a, 410b, 410c, ie, during acceleration, during steady rotation, during stop, and during standby. Specifically, the 1-byte (storage unit) variable assigned to the motor phase is accelerated = 3, steady rotation = 2, stopped = 1, and waiting = It changes to a value such as 0.

(Step S2030-17)
The main CPU 500a determines whether any of the reels 410a, 410b, and 410c are rotating normally and accelerating based on the motor phase obtained in step S2030-15. As a result, if it is determined that none of the reels 410a, 410b, and 410c are in steady rotation or acceleration, the process proceeds to step S2030-21, and any one of the reels 410a, 410b, and 410c is in steady rotation or acceleration. If it is determined to be in the middle, the process moves to step S2030-19.

(Step S2030-19)
The main CPU 500a executes rotation error processing for making settings when an error is detected for the reels 410a, 410b, and 410c.

(Step S2030-21)
The main CPU 500a restores the saved register group.

(Step S2030-23)
The main CPU 500a permits the interrupt and terminates the state return processing. As a result, the main CPU 500a returns to the state immediately before the power was turned off.

FIG. 88 is a flowchart for explaining the game start process (S2100) in the main control board 500. FIG.

(Step S2100-1)
The main CPU 500a executes a replay state identification signal output setting process for outputting a replay state identification signal indicating whether or not it is a replay.

(Step S2100-3)
The main CPU 500a sets the input number display output bit OFF for turning off (turning off) the bit corresponding to the input number display indicating the number of inserted medals (the number of bets).

(Step S2100-5)
The main CPU 500a executes output port image setting processing for updating the output image for the bit set in step S2100-3.

(Step S2100-7)
The main CPU 500a sets a game start wait timer.

(Step S2100-9)
The main CPU 500a executes timer wait processing for waiting until the game start wait timer reaches zero.

(Step S2100-11)
The main CPU 500a executes a 1-game RAM clearing process for clearing an area to be cleared for each game out of the used area in the main RAM 500c.

(Step S2100-13)
The main CPU 500a executes bonus signal setting processing for setting a bonus signal.

(Step S2100-15)
The main CPU 500a executes edge clear processing for clearing the edge information of the input port image.

(Step S2200)
The main CPU 500a executes a game medal insertion process for accepting insertion of medals. This game medal insertion process will be described later.

FIG. 89 is a flow chart for explaining the game medal insertion process (S2200) in the main control board 500. FIG.

(Step S2200-1)
The main CPU 500a executes error confirmation processing for confirming detection results of various errors.

(Step S2200-3)
The main CPU 500a executes edge check processing for detecting the rising edge (ON edge) and falling edge (OFF edge) of the signal of the input port.

(Step S2200-5)
The main CPU 500a acquires a door open error detection flag that is set to 1 when the front upper door 404 or the front lower door 406 is open.

(Step S2200-7)
Main CPU 500a determines whether front upper door 404 and front lower door 406 are closed based on the door open error detection flag obtained in step S2200-5. As a result, when it is determined that the front upper door 404 and the front lower door 406 are closed, the process moves to step S2200-17, and at least one of the front upper door 404 or the front lower door 406 is not closed. If so, the process moves to step S2200-9.

(Step S2200-9)
The main CPU 500a sets an error code "E8" indicating that at least one of the front upper door 404 and the front lower door 406 is open.

(Step S2200-11)
The main CPU 500a performs error display, request for warning sound, and error wait processing for waiting for error recovery.

(Step S2200-13)
The main CPU 500a executes setting value confirmation processing for confirming the setting values.

(Step S2200-15)
The main CPU 500a executes edge clear processing for clearing the edge information of the input port image.

(Step S2200-17)
The main CPU 500a executes a credit button check process for withdrawing accumulated medals when a credit switch (not shown) for withdrawing accumulated (credited) medals is pressed.

(Step S2200-19)
The main CPU 500a executes game medal insertion button related processing for betting medals. Here, when the bet switch 416 is pressed, a specified number of accumulated (credited) medals is betted, and the number of accumulated medals is subtracted by the number of bets. Also, when medals are inserted through the medal insertion slot 414a, the medals are bet up to a prescribed number, and if more medals than the prescribed number are inserted, that amount is added to the number of stored medals.

(Step S2200-21)
The main CPU 500a executes game medal acquisition processing for confirming whether the number of inserted coins is a specified number.

(Step S2200-23)
The main CPU 500a determines whether or not the number of inserted coins is not the prescribed number based on the confirmation result of step S2200-21. As a result, if it is determined that the number of input cards is not the specified number, the process proceeds to step S2200-1, and if it is determined that the number of input cards is the specified number, the process proceeds to step S2200-25.

(Step S2200-25)
The main CPU 500a sets a start indicator output bit for turning on (lighting) a start indicator (not shown) that indicates whether the operation of the start switch 418 is valid.

(Step S2200-27)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the falling edge (pressing) of the start switch 418 is detected. As a result, if it is determined that the falling edge of start switch 418 has not been detected, the process proceeds to step S2200-1, and if it is determined that the falling edge of start switch 418 has been detected, step S2200. -29 is processed.

(Step S2200-29)
The main CPU 500a clears the main payout display portion buffer in order to clear the display of the main payout display portion 432. FIG.

(Step S2200-31)
The main CPU 500a executes a replay state identification signal clear process for clearing the replay state identification signal.

(Step S2200-33)
The main CPU 500a executes blocker blocking preprocessing for turning off (extinguishing) the start indicator.

(Step S2200-35)
The main CPU 500a sets a lever depression command indicating that the start switch 418 has been depressed in the transmission buffer.

(Step S2300)
The main CPU 500a executes an internal lottery process for performing a winning type lottery. This internal lottery process will be described later.

FIG. 90 is a flowchart for explaining internal lottery processing (S2300) in main control board 500. FIG.

(Step S2300-1)
The main CPU 500a acquires set value data.

(Step S2300-3)
The main CPU 500a sets an error code "EC" indicating a setting value abnormality error.

(Step S2300-5)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the set value data obtained in step S2300-1 is abnormal. As a result, if it is determined that the set value data is abnormal, the process proceeds to step S2011, and if it is determined that the set value data is not abnormal, the process proceeds to step S2300-7.

(Step S2300-7)
The main CPU 500a acquires the winning type lottery random number updated by the random number generator 500d.

(Step S2300-9)
The main CPU 500a executes state offset acquisition processing for acquiring an offset value related to the game state.

(Step S2300-11)
The main CPU 500a sets the address of the internal lottery area definition table (winning type lottery table).

(Step S2300-13)
The main CPU 500a sets the value indicated by the address obtained by adding the offset value obtained in step S2300-9 to the address set in step S2300-11 as the initial value of the winning area. Here, the first winning area in the winning type lottery table in the current gaming state is set as the initial value.

(Step S2300-15)
The main CPU 500a acquires lottery data, which is a numerical value indicating the winning range of the winning area, and executes lottery data acquisition processing for shifting the winning area by one.

(Step S2300-17)
The main CPU 500a determines whether or not the winning type lottery is performed. As a result, when it is determined that the winning type lottery will not be performed, the process is moved to step S2300-21, and when it is determined that the winning type lottery is to be performed, the process is moved to step S2300-19.

(Step S2300-19)
The main CPU 500a subtracts the lottery data from the random number value.

(Step S2300-21)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the result of the subtraction in step S2300-19 is negative, that is, whether the winning region is won by the winning type lottery. As a result, when it is determined that the winning type lottery has been won, the process moves to step S2400, and when it is determined that the winning type lottery has not been won, the process moves to step S2300-23.

(Step S2300-23)
The main CPU 500a determines whether or not the winning type lottery has ended. As a result, when it is determined that the winning type lottery has not ended, the process moves to step S2300-15, and when it is determined that the winning type lottery has ended, the process moves to step S2300-25.

(Step S2300-25)
The main CPU 500a clears the trigger role type.

(Step S2400)
The main CPU 500a executes a symbol code setting process for setting a symbol code based on the winning area and the game state. This symbol code setting process will be described later.

FIG. 91 is a flow chart for explaining the symbol code setting process (S2400) in the main control board 500. FIG.

(Step S2400-1)
The main CPU 500a acquires the winning area that was won in step S2300, and if the acquired winning area includes a bonus combination, executes a game state setting process of setting the game state to the internal middle game state.

(Step S2400-3)
The main CPU 500a sets the winning area obtained in step S2400-1 as the stop control number.

(Step S2400-5)
The main CPU 500a determines (sets) the winning type based on the winning area obtained in step S2400-1.

(Step S2400-7)
The main CPU 500a executes a symbol code initial setting process for setting a symbol code indicating a symbol that can be displayed and a symbol to be drawn based on the stop control number set in step S2400-3.

(Step S2400-9)
The main CPU 500a executes display symbol bit initial value setting processing for setting display symbol bits.

(Step S2400-11)
The main CPU 500a executes an execution flag setting process for setting an execution flag, various processes related to the effect state, processing related to the auxiliary effect, and the like.

(Step S2400-13)
The main CPU 500a sets an effect command, which is a command relating to the advantageous section, in the transmission buffer.

(Step S2400-15)
The main CPU 500a sets a winning information command indicating the winning type in the transmission buffer.

(Step S2400-17)
The main CPU 500a checks the one-game timer.

(Step S2400-19)
The main CPU 500a sets a reel before rotation command indicating that the reels 410a, 410b and 410c are before rotation in the transmission buffer.

(Step S2400-21)
The main CPU 500a executes an excitation release waiting process for waiting for the excitation release of the stepping motor 452. FIG.

(Step S2400-23)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the one-game timer is not zero. As a result, when it is determined that the one-game timer is not 0, the process moves to step S2400-23, and when it is determined that the one-game timer is 0, the process moves to step S2400-25.

(Step S2400-25)
The main CPU 500a executes reel start processing for starting rotation of the reels 410a, 410b, and 410c. Here, the motor phases of the reels 410a, 410b, and 410c are set during acceleration to start the rotation of each reel, and the one-game timer is set to a value corresponding to 4.1 seconds.

(Step S2400-27)
The main CPU 500a sets a reel start command indicating that the reels 410a, 410b, and 410c have started rotating in the transmission buffer.

(Step S2500)
The main CPU 500a executes processing during reel rotation, which is processing during rotation of the reels 410a, 410b, and 410c. Note that this process during rotation of the drum will be described later.

FIG. 92 is a flowchart for explaining the process during drum rotation (S2500) in main control board 500. FIG.

(Step S2500-1)
The main CPU 500a sets the stop indicator output bit off (output image) to turn off (light off) the bit corresponding to the indicator (not shown) of the stop switches 420a, 420b, 420c. Here, the stop indicator output bit is composed of a 3-bit bit string, each bit corresponding to the emission color of the three stop switches 420a, 420b, and 420c, represented by blue=1 and red=0. be done.

(Step S2500-3)
Main CPU 500a executes output port image setting processing for updating the output image for the bit set in step S2500-1.

(Step S2500-5)
The main CPU 500a executes error confirmation processing for confirming detection results of various errors.

(Step S2500-7)
The main CPU 500a refers to the index flags and acquires the indexes of the rotating reels 410a, 410b, and 410c. Note that the index flag is set only after the reels 410a, 410b, and 410c have reached the constant rotation speed. It also indicates that the speed has been reached.

(Step S2500-9)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the index flags of all the reels 410a, 410b, and 410c have been detected. As a result, if it is determined that all index flags have not been detected, the process proceeds to step S2500-1, and if it is determined that all index flags have been detected, the process proceeds to step S2500-11.

(Step S2500-11)
The main CPU 500a acquires a stop spinning reel bit indicating the reels 410a, 410b, and 410c that are stopping or starting to stop. Here, the stop reel bit is composed of a 3-bit bit string, each bit corresponding to one of the three reels 410a, 410b, 410c, constant speed state=1, acceleration state, deceleration state. Or it is represented by stop state=0.

(Step S2500-13)
The main CPU 500a saves the stop reel bit obtained in step S2500-11 as a reel rotating flag.

(Step S2500-15)
The main CPU 500a sets the stop indicator output bit ON (output image) to turn on (light off) the bit corresponding to the indicators (not shown) of the stop switches 420a, 420b, 420c.

(Step S2500-17)
The main CPU 500a acquires an image of the input port 0 and executes an operation target bit extraction process for extracting an operation target bit from the acquired image. Here, the operation target bit is composed of a 3-bit bit string, and each bit is associated with one of the three stop switches 420a, 420b, and 420c. =0.

(Step S2500-19)
The main CPU 500a performs a logical product operation between the rotating drum flag acquired in step S2500-13 and the operation target bit extracted in step S2500-17. Here, if the reel 410 is rotating and the stop switch 420 corresponding to the reel is operated, that is, if the operated stop switch 420 corresponds to the effectively rotating reel 410 , the logical AND is 1.

(Step S2500-21)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the AND calculated in step S2500-19 is 0, that is, whether the stop switch 420 corresponding to the rotating reel 410 has been operated. As a result, when it is determined that the stop switch 420 corresponding to the rotating reel 410 is not operated, the process moves to step S2500-3, and the stop switch 420 corresponding to the rotating reel 410 is operated. If it is determined that there is, the process moves to step S2500-23.

(Step S2500-23)
The main CPU 500a acquires the output image including the stop indicator output bit, and computes the logical product of the acquired output image and the logical product computed in step S2500-19. Here, the logical product bit is 0 when the operated stop switch 420 is lit in red, and the logical product bit is 1 when it is lit in blue.

(Step S2500-25)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the logical product calculated in step S2500-23 is 0, that is, whether the operated stop switch 420 is lit in red. As a result, if it is determined that the operated stop switch 420 is lit in red, the process proceeds to step S2500-1, and if it is determined that the operated stop switch 420 is not lit in red, step S2500- 27 is processed.

(Step S2500-27)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the operated stop switch 420 is not valid. As a result, if it is determined that the operated stop switch 420 is not valid, the process proceeds to step S2500-1, and if it is determined that the operated stop switch 420 is valid, the process proceeds to step S2500-29. Transfer. Here, it is determined whether or not one stop switch 420 has been operated. If it is determined that one stop switch 420 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S2500-29, and if it is determined that there are two or more stop switches 420 operated to step S2500-1.

(Step S2500-29)
The main CPU 500a executes stop control reel setting processing for acquiring various parameters for stopping the reel 410 corresponding to the operated stop switch 420. FIG.

(Step S2500-31)
The main CPU 500a prohibits interrupts.

(Step S2500-33)
The main CPU 500a executes a depression reference position acquisition process for deriving the symbol number of the symbol positioned on the activated line A as the depression reference position.

(Step S2500-35)
The main CPU 500 a executes a sliding frame number acquisition process for determining the number of sliding frames of the reel 410 .

(Step S2600)
The main CPU 500a executes reel stop processing for stopping the reel 410 corresponding to the stop switch 420 that has been operated. Note that this spinning drum stop processing will be described later.

FIG. 93 is a flow chart for explaining the spinning drum stopping process (S2600) in the main control board 500. FIG.

(Step S2600-1)
The main CPU 500a acquires the depression reference position derived in step S2500-35.

(Step S2600-3)
The main CPU 500a calculates the stop request number by correcting the number of sliding frames determined in step S2500-37 with respect to the depression reference position acquired in step S2600-1.

(Step S2600-5)
The main CPU 500a sets (sets to 1) a stop request flag. The stop request flag is a flag for requesting the stop processing of the target reel 410 to the programs that operate in parallel. By setting the stop request flag to 1, the symbol corresponding to the stop request number is enabled. It becomes possible to stop on line A. The stop request flag and the stop request number are read out by a program running in parallel, and the reel 410 is stopped. When the stop processing is completed, the program resets the stop request flag to 0 (OFF).

(Step S2600-7)
The main CPU 500a permits interrupts.

(Step S2600-9)
The main CPU 500a sets a stop information command indicating the stop order of the reels 410 in the transmission buffer.

(Step S2600-11)
The main CPU 500a sets the stop indicator output bit off (output image) to turn off (light off) the bit corresponding to the indicator (not shown) of the stop switch 420. FIG.

(Step S2600-13)
The main CPU 500a executes output port image setting processing for updating the output image for the bit set in step S2600-11.

(Step S2600-15)
The main CPU 500a executes display symbol bit setting processing for setting display symbol bits.

(Step S2600-17)
The main CPU 500a executes the next cylinder setting preprocessing for stopping the next reel 410. FIG.

(Step S2600-19)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the stop processing of all the reels 410 has been completed. As a result, if it is determined that the stop processing for all the reels 410 has not been completed, the process proceeds to step S2500, and if it is determined that the stop processing for all the reels 410 has been completed, the process proceeds to step S2600-21. transfer processing.

(Step S2600-21)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the stop request flag is ON for any reel 410, that is, whether all the reels 410 have stopped. As a result, if it is determined that all the reels 410 have not stopped, the process moves to step S2600-21, and if it is determined that all the reels 410 have stopped, the process moves to step S2600-23.

(Step S2600-23)
The main CPU 500a executes error confirmation processing for confirming detection results of various errors.

(Step S2600-25)
The main CPU 500a executes an operation target bit extraction process for extracting information on the operation target bit.

(Step S2600-27)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the stop switch 420 is pressed based on the operation target bit obtained in step S2600-25. As a result, if it is determined that stop switch 420 has been pressed, the process proceeds to step S2600-23, and if it is determined that stop switch 420 has not been pressed, the process proceeds to step S2700.

(Step S2700)
The main CPU 500a executes a display determination process for determining a winning winning combination. Note that this display determination processing will be described later.

FIG. 94 is a flow chart for explaining the display determination process (S2700) in main control board 500. FIG.

(Step S2700-1)
The main CPU 500 a clears the buffer of the main payout display section 432 .

(Step S2700-3)
The main CPU 500a determines whether or not a display determination abnormality has occurred, depending on whether or not the symbol combination displayed on the activated line A matches the symbol combination permitted to be displayed on the activated line A. Execute the detection process.

(Step S2700-5)
The main CPU 500a sets an error code "EE" indicating display determination abnormality (error).

(Step S2700-7)
The main CPU 500a determines whether display determination is abnormal based on the determination result of step S2700-3. As a result, if it is determined that the display determination is abnormal, the process moves to step S2011, and if it is determined that the display determination is not abnormal, the process moves to step S2700-9.

(Step S2700-9)
The main CPU 500a executes display symbol identification and generation processing for determining a winning combination based on the symbol combination stopped (displayed) on the activated line A.

(Step S2700-11)
The main CPU 500a sets 0 as the initial value of the payout number.

(Step S2700-13)
The main CPU 500a determines whether or not a minor win has been won. As a result, when it is determined that a minor winning combination has been won, the process proceeds to step S2700-15, and when it is determined that a minor winning combination has not been won, the process proceeds to step S2700-35.

(Step S2700-15)
The main CPU 500a turns on a winning flag indicating that a minor winning combination has been won.

(Step S2700-17)
The main CPU 500a executes payout number setting processing for setting the number of payouts according to the winning minor combination.

(Step S2700-19)
The main CPU 500a determines whether it is an advantageous section. As a result, if it is determined that it is not an advantageous section, the process moves to step S2800, and if it is determined that it is an advantageous section, the process moves to step S2700-21.

(Step S2700-21)
The main CPU 500a acquires the value of the advantageous section MY counter that counts the net increase in the number of coins during the advantageous section.

(Step S2700-23)
The main CPU 500a adds the payout number to the value of the advantageous section MY counter acquired in step S2700-23.

(Step S2700-25)
The main CPU 500a acquires the number of inserted cards in the game.

(Step S2700-27)
The main CPU 500a subtracts the inserted number from the value added in step S2700-23.

(Step S2700-29)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the subtraction result in step S2700-27 is negative. As a result, if it is determined that the subtraction result is not negative, the process moves to step S2700-33, and if it is determined that the subtraction result is negative, the process moves to step S2700-31.

(Step S2700-31)
The main CPU 500a clears (sets to 0) the value of the advantageous section MY counter.

(Step S2700-33)
The main CPU 500a updates the value of the advantageous section MY counter to the value subtracted in step S2700-27 or the value cleared in step S2700-31.

(Step S2700-35)
The main CPU 500a determines whether or not the replay combination has won. As a result, when it is determined that the replay combination has not won, the process moves to step S2800, and when it is determined that the replay combination has won, the process moves to step S2700-37.

(Step S2700-37)
The main CPU 500a sets the inserted number as the payout number.

(Step S2700-39)
The main CPU 500a turns on the replay flag.

(Step S2700-41)
The main CPU 500a sets the number of sheets automatically inserted.

(Step S2800)
The main CPU 500a executes payout processing for paying out medals. This payout process will be described later.

FIG. 95 is a flow chart explaining the payout process (S2800) in the main control board 500. FIG.

(Step S2800-1)
The main CPU 500a acquires the replaying flag.

(Step S2800-3)
The main CPU 500a sets a payout start command indicating that the payout of medals has started in the transmission buffer.

(Step S2800-5)
The main CPU 500a determines whether or not the replay combination has won based on the replay operation flag acquired in step S2800-1. As a result, when it is determined that the replay combination has won, the process moves to step S2800-41, and when it is determined that the replay combination has not won, the process moves to step S2800-7.

(Step S2800-7)
The main CPU 500 a executes a main indicator display process for displaying 0 on the main payout display section 432 .

(Step S2800-9)
The main CPU 500a determines that there is no payout (the number of payouts is 0). As a result, when it is determined that there is no payout, the process moves to step S2800-35, and when it is determined that there is a payout, the process moves to step S2800-11.

(Step S2800-11)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the number of stored coins is 50 or more. As a result, if it is determined that the number of stored sheets is 50 or more, the process moves to step S2800-13, and if it is determined that the number of stored sheets is not 50 or more, the process moves to step S2800-15.

(Step S2800-13)
The main CPU 500a executes medal payout device control processing to pay out one medal from the medal payout device 442, and shifts the processing to step S2800-23.

(Step S2800-15)
The main CPU 500a sets a payout start interval timer.

(Step S2800-17)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the payout start timer is not 0, that is, whether it is the first payout. As a result, when it is determined that it is the time of the first payout, the process moves to step S2800-21, and when it is determined that it is not the time of the first payout, the process moves to step S2800-19.

(Step S2800-19)
The main CPU 500a executes timer wait processing for waiting until the payout start interval timer reaches zero.

(Step S2800-21)
The main CPU 500a increments the stored number by one.

(Step S2800-23)
The main CPU 500a sets a payout execution command indicating that one medal has been paid out in the transmission buffer.

(Step S2800-25)
The main CPU 500a executes main display pre-display processing for displaying the number of payouts that have already been paid out on the main payout display section 432. FIG.

(Step S2800-27)
The main CPU 500a determines whether it is in the bonus game state. As a result, when it is determined that the game is not in the bonus game state, the process moves to step S2800-31, and when it is determined to be in the bonus game state, the process moves to step S2800-29.

(Step S2800-29)
The main CPU 500a increments, by one, the number of medals paid out during bonus operation, which is the number of medals paid out in the bonus game state.

(Step S2800-31)
The main CPU 500a determines whether or not the payout of the number of medals to be paid out has been completed. As a result, if it is determined that the payout has not ended, the process moves to step S2800-11, and if it is determined that the payout has ended, the process moves to step S2800-33.

(Step S2800-33)
The main CPU 500a executes payout end processing for ending the payout of medals.

(Step S2800-35)
The main CPU 500a determines whether an over error has been detected. As a result, if it is determined that no over error has been detected, the process proceeds to step S2800-41, and if it is determined that an over error has been detected, the process proceeds to step S2800-37.

(Step S2800-37)
The main CPU 500a sets an error code "E5" indicating an over error.

(Step S2800-39)
The main CPU 500a performs error display, request for warning sound, and error wait processing for waiting for error recovery.

(Step S2800-41)
The main CPU 500a sets a payout end command indicating that the payout of medals has ended in the transmission buffer.

(Step S2900)
The main CPU 500a executes a game transition process for transitioning a game state, managing an advantageous interval, and the like. This game transition processing will be described later.

FIG. 96 is a flow chart for explaining game transition processing (S2900) in the main control board 500. FIG.

(Step S2900-1)
The main CPU 500a acquires a replay flag and turns on or off a bit corresponding to a replay indicator (not shown) indicating that the next game is a replay, based on the acquired replay flag. For this purpose, the stop indicator output bit off (output image) is set, and replay indicator control processing is executed to update the output bit of the set output image.

(Step S2900-3)
When a bonus combination is won, the main CPU 500a executes a role product actuation symbol display process for setting various parameters for controlling the bonus game state.

(Step S2900-5)
The main CPU 500a executes a bonus operation end process for shifting the game state to a non-internal game state when the number of coins obtained during bonus operation reaches a predetermined number in the bonus game state.

(Step S2900-7)
The main CPU 500a executes advantageous section update processing for managing advantageous sections.

(Step S2900-9)
The main CPU 500a determines whether or not the next game is in the AT effect state. As a result, when it is determined that the next game is not in the AT effect state, the process is shifted to step S2900-15, and when it is determined that the next game is in the AT effect state, the process is shifted to step S2900-11.

(Step S2900-11)
The main CPU 500a determines whether it is in the bonus game state. As a result, when it is determined that it is not in the bonus game state, the process moves to step S2900-15, and when it is determined that it is in the bonus game state, the process moves to step S2900-13.

(Step S2900-13)
The main CPU 500a sets on an advantageous lamp flag for lighting the section indicator 460. FIG.

(Step S2900-15)
The main CPU 500a executes an effect command setting process for setting an effect command, which is a command relating to the advantageous section, in the transmission buffer.

(Step S2900-17)
The main CPU 500a sets a game end command indicating that one game has ended in the transmission buffer.

(Step S2900-19)
The main CPU 500a executes terminal board signal output processing for outputting an external signal.

(Step S2900-21)
The main CPU 500a determines whether or not the effect wait timer that is set when ending the advantageous section in step S2900-7 is not 0. As a result, when it is determined that the effect wait timer is not 0, the process moves to step S2900-21, and when it is determined that the effect wait timer is 0, the process moves to step S2900-23.

(Step S2900-23)
The main CPU 500a sets a game state command indicating a game state in the transmission buffer.

(Step S2900-25)
The main CPU 500a sets a game start command indicating the start of the next game in the transmission buffer, and shifts the process to step S2100.

One game is executed through a series of processes from step S2100 to step S2900. Thereafter, steps S2100 to S2900 are repeated.

Next, save processing and timer interrupt processing in the main control board 500 will be described.

(Evacuation processing when main control board 500 is powered off)
FIG. 97 is a flow chart for explaining the saving process at power-off in the main control board 500. FIG. The main CPU 500a monitors the power-off detection circuit, and when the power supply voltage drops below a predetermined value, it interrupts and executes the power-off saving process.

(Step S3000-1)
When the power-off warning signal is input, the main CPU 500a saves the register.

(Step S3000-3)
The main CPU 500a checks the power-off notice signal.

(Step S3000-5)
The main CPU 500a determines whether a power-off warning signal is detected. As a result, if it is determined that the power cut warning signal has been detected, the process moves to step S3000-11, and if it is determined that the power cut warning signal has not been detected, the process moves to step S3000-7. .

(Step S3000-7)
The main CPU 500a restores the register.

(Step S3000-9)
The main CPU 500a performs a process for permitting an interrupt, and terminates the power-off saving process.

(Step S3000-11)
The main CPU 500a executes output port clear processing to stop output from the output port.

(Step S3000-13)
The main CPU 500a executes save processing for the separate area when the power is turned off.

(Step S3000-15)
The main CPU 500a executes RAM protection setting processing necessary to prohibit access to the main RAM 300c.

(Step S3000-17)
The main CPU 500a sets the counter value of the loop counter to the predetermined number of power failure detection signal detections in order to set the power failure occurrence monitoring time.

(Step S3000-19)
The main CPU 500a subtracts 1 from the value of the loop counter set in step S3000-17.

(Step S3000-21)
The main CPU 500a determines whether or not the counter value of the loop counter is zero. As a result, if it is determined that the counter value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S3000-19, and if it is determined that the counter value is 0, the above-described CPU initialization process (step S1000) is performed.

It should be noted that if the power is actually turned off, the operation of the slot machine 400 is stopped during the loop of steps S3000-19 to S3000-21.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board 500)
FIG. 98 is a flowchart for explaining timer interrupt processing in the main control board 500. FIG. The main control board 500 is provided with a reset clock pulse generating circuit that generates a clock pulse every predetermined period (1.49 milliseconds in the simultaneous rotation reference example, hereinafter referred to as "1.49 ms"). Then, when a clock pulse is generated by the reset clock pulse generation circuit, it interrupts and the following timer interrupt processing is executed.

(Step S3100-1)
The main CPU 500a saves the register.

(Step S3100-3)
The main CPU 500a clears the interrupt flag.

(Step S3100-5)
The main CPU 500a reads various input port images and executes port input processing for accurately acquiring the latest switch states.

(Step S3100-7)
The main CPU 500a outputs the set output image to the output port, the main credit display section 430, the main payout display section 432, the input number display, the start display, the display of the stop switches 420a, 420b, and 420c, and the replay display. dynamic port output processing for controlling the lighting of the section indicator 460.

(Step S3100-9)
The main CPU 500a updates the timer interrupt phase. The timer interrupt phase is one of 0 to 3. Here, when the timer interrupt phase is 0, 1, or 2, 1 is added, and when the timer interrupt phase is 3, it is set to 0. Be changed.

(Step S3100-11)
The main CPU 500 a performs sub-command transmission processing for transmitting the command stored in the transmission buffer to the sub-control board 502 .

(Step S3100-13)
The main CPU 500 a executes stepping motor control processing for controlling the stepping motor 452 .

(Step S3100-15)
The main CPU 500 a executes output port image output processing for outputting an output image to be output to the medal payout device 442 .

(Step S3100-17)
The main CPU 500a executes random number update processing for updating various random numbers.

(Step S3100-19)
The main CPU 500a executes fraud monitoring processing for detecting errors in order to output external signals (external signals 4 and 5) corresponding to errors to the outside.

(Step S3100-21)
The main CPU 500a executes a module (subroutine) corresponding to the timer interrupt processing phase updated in step S3100-9. Here, the timer interrupt processing phase is set to one of 0 to 3, and one module corresponding to each of the timer interrupt processing phases 0 to 3 is provided (four in total). One module will be executed once every four timer interrupt processing (every 5.96ms). For example, a module that executes time monitoring processing for subtracting various timers is associated with one timer interrupt processing phase.

(Step S3100-23)
The main CPU 500a executes test signal output processing for outputting the test signal to the outside.

(Step S3100-25)
The main CPU 500a reads various input port images and executes port input processing for accurately acquiring the latest switch states.

(Step S3100-27)
The main CPU 500a restores the register.

(Step S3100-29)
The main CPU 300a permits the interrupt and terminates the timer interrupt process.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main control board 500 and the sub control board 502 are arranged so as to share the functional part for progressing the game. Alternatively, the functional units of the sub control substrate 502 may be arranged on the main control substrate 500, or all the functional units may be collectively arranged on one control substrate.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, only one type of AT effect state is provided. good too.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game is played using medals as game value, but the game value may be electrical information (so-called medalless). In this case, when the winning combination wins, the amount of value corresponding to the winning combination may be given to the player as electrical information.

Further, each process performed by the main control board 500 and the sub control board 502 described above does not necessarily have to be processed in time series according to the order described as the flowchart, and may include parallel or subroutine processing.

Further, each process performed by the main control board 500 and the sub control board 502 described above does not necessarily have to be processed in time series according to the order described as the flowchart, and may include parallel or subroutine processing.

<Configuration around the CPU of the main control board>
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining electrical connections around the main CPU 300a. The main CPU 300 a includes a CPU core 700 and a bus controller 702 . The CPU core 700 controls the bus controller 702 through a bus control signal (Bus Cont) output from the BC terminal, reads data from the main ROM 300b, the main RAM 300c, or the input/output unit 704, or reads data from the main RAM 300c or the input/output unit 704. Data is written to the portion 704 . Here, as the main CPU 300a, a microprocessor based on the Z80 series CPU sold by LETech is used. Although the main CPU 300a, main ROM 300b, and main RAM 300c of the pachinko machine will be described here, it goes without saying that they can be replaced with the main CPU 500a, main ROM 500b, and main RAM 500c of the slot machine 400.

For example, when reading data from the main ROM 300b, the main RAM 300c, or the input/output unit 704, the bus controller 702 outputs a 16-bit address (A[16]) signal and outputs the main ROM 300b, Either the main RAM 300c or the input/output unit 704 is specified, and the read (RD) signal is controlled to read the data (D[8]) signal from the main ROM 300b, the main RAM 300c, or the input/output unit 704. . When data is written to the main RAM 300c or the input/output unit 704, the bus controller 702 outputs an address (A[16]) signal and a data (D[8]) signal to the main RAM 300c through decoders 706b and 706c. , or specifies one of the input/output units 704 and controls the write (WR) signal to write the data (D[8]) signal to the main RAM 300 c or the input/output unit 704 .

Here, as will be described later, the address space of the input/output unit 704 is integrated with the address spaces of the main ROM 300b and the main RAM 300c. Therefore, conventionally, a memory request (MREQ) terminal and an I/O request (IORQ) terminal for outputting a signal for specifying whether to access memory or I/O are not provided. By reassigning these two terminals to arbitrary other signals, the degree of freedom in program development can be increased.

The CPU core 700 also includes an interrupt/wait (INT/WAIT) signal that triggers the start of interrupt processing, a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) signal that allows interrupt processing to be executed with the highest priority, and bus signals that are set to high impedance. An external signal such as a transitionable bus request (BUSREQ) signal is also input.

FIG. 100 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the CPU core 700. As shown in FIG. CPU core 700 includes external input unit 710 , state control unit 712 , central control unit 714 , register unit 716 and arithmetic logic unit (ALU) 718 . The external input unit 710 receives external signals and outputs control information based on the external signals to the state control unit 712 and the central control unit 714 .

The state control unit 712 manages and transitions internal states (RESET, instruction fetch, instruction decode, operation, memory load, memory store, HALT, etc.) based on input control information to determine the operating state of the CPU core 700. At the same time, it outputs control information based on its operating state to the central control unit 714 .

Central control unit 714 extracts an operation code (instruction) from input data (DI[8]) input via bus controller 702 and controls ALU 718 based on the command decoded by the instruction decoder. Also, the central control unit 714 acquires necessary information from each register of the register unit 716 and updates each register according to the decoded command.

Register unit 716 includes selector ports 722 a , 722 b , 722 c , input bank selector 724 , first register bank 726 , second register bank 728 , output bank selector 730 , address port 732 and individual registers 734 . The individual register 734 includes a 16-bit program counter (PC) indicating the address of the next program to be executed, an 8-bit interrupt (I) register used in interrupt mode, and an 8-bit counter for counting opcode fetch cycles. It includes a bit refresh (R) register and an 8-bit interrupt enable (IFF) register that controls interrupt enable/disable.

In addition, the register unit 716 has a random number generator for obtaining various random numbers (jackpot determination random number, winning pattern random number, reach group determination random number, reach mode determination random number, variation pattern random number, winning determination random number) related to the big win lottery. A device (not shown) is associated with the input port (FE73h-FE9Ch) to obtain the latched random value.

The random number generator operates with a system clock (a clock obtained by dividing an external input by two) and generates random numbers less than a predetermined maximum value. The random number generator is a random number generator capable of setting the maximum value of random numbers. A configurable random number generator is provided with eight channels. Here, the 16-bit maximum value setting random number generator can select the random number update period within the range of 32 to 47 clocks, and the maximum value setting range can be set within the range of 256 to 65,535. In addition, the 8-bit maximum value setting random number generator can select the random number update period in the range of 16 to 31 clocks, and the maximum value setting range can be set in the range of 16 to 255 for 4 channels. It can be set in the range of 64-255. In addition, as a random number generator with a fixed maximum value of random numbers, a random number generator capable of setting a maximum value of 16 bits has four channels and a random number generator capable of setting a maximum value of 8 bits. The instrument is prepared for 8 channels. Here, the 16-bit fixed maximum value random number generator has a fixed random number update cycle of 1 clock and a maximum value of 65,535. The 8-bit fixed maximum value random number generator has a fixed random number update cycle of 1 clock and a maximum value of 255.

If the number of types of random numbers is insufficient, the random numbers obtained from the hardware random number generator (random number generator) are multiplied by a predetermined number in the program, or divided to generate other random numbers (software random number generator).

FIG. 101 is a diagram explaining the structure of a register. The register unit 716 is provided with a first register bank (bank 0) 726 and a second register bank (bank 1) 728 paired with the first register bank 726 . The first register bank 726 is provided with a main register group (front register group) 726a and a sub-register group (back register group) 726b paired with the main register group 726a. A main register group 728a and a sub-register group 728b paired with the main register group 728a are provided. The main register group 726a and sub-register group 726b of the first register bank 726 and the main register group 728a and sub-register group 728b of the second register bank 728 are both 8-bit registers (Q, A, F, B, C, D, E, H, L) and 16-bit registers (IX, IY). However, unlike the sub-register groups 726b and 728b, the main register groups 726a and 728a further include an 8-bit register (U) and a 16-bit register (SP). The main CPUs 300a and 500a switch between the first register bank 726 and the second register bank 728 and can access only one of the register banks indicated by the register bank designation register RB in the F register, which will be described later. cannot be accessed at the same time.

Among the registers shown in FIG. 101, Q registers are 8-bit registers that are provided in two sets in each register bank as extended registers and store the high-order bytes of addresses used in some commands. If, for example, F0h is set as the value of the Q register, the main CPU 300a, 500a can use the Q register to access F000h to F0FFh of the main RAM 300c. The U register is an 8-bit register that is provided in each register bank as an extension register and stores the upper byte of the address used in some commands. For example, when FEh is set as the value of the U register, the main CPUs 300a and 500a include built-in devices (timers, random number generators, external input/output circuits, etc.) connected to the input/output units 704 of FE00h to FEFFh. A U register can be used to access the . The A register is a general-purpose register that also functions as an 8-bit accumulator used for arithmetic processing and data transfer. The F register is an 8-bit flag register that holds various calculation results. Here, as shown in FIG. 101, each bit of the F register, from the most significant bit (MSB: Most Significant Bit) to the least significant bit (LSB: Least Significant Bit), S is 1 when the operation result is negative. , Z is a zero flag (first zero flag) that is set to 1 when all bits are 0 as a result of the operation, and TZ is a data transfer instruction (LD; load) executed by , is a specific bit flag (second zero flag) of extended specifications for gaming machines, which is set to 1 (value changes) when all bits are 0, and is sometimes called a teeze flag. H is a half-carry flag that cannot be touched by the programmer, and RB (register bank designation register) is a register bank monitor that indicates the current register bank (first register bank 726=0, second register bank 728=1). , P/V is a parity overflow flag, N is an addition/subtraction flag that cannot be touched by the programmer, and C is a carry flag that is set to 1 when a carry or borrow occurs as a result of an operation. The F register constitutes the A register and the pair register AF.

The B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, and L register are two sets of 8-bit general-purpose registers provided in each register bank, each of which is a predetermined combination of 16-bit pairs. Registers (eg, registers BC, DE, HL, and multiple combinations exist) are configured and utilized. The IX and IY registers are 16-bit general-purpose registers used for index addressing. The SP (stack pointer) register is 16 bits and stores an address that serves as a stack pointer. Q' register, A' register, F' register, B' register, C' register, D' register, E' register, H' register, L' register, IX' register, IY' register are Q register, A register , F register, B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, L register, IX register, and IY register. Possible sub-register groups 726b, 728b, where the A' and F' registers form a pair register AF', the B' and C' registers form a pair register BC', and the D' and E' registers. constitute a pair register DE', and the H' register and L' register constitute a pair register HL'. Note that the pair registers are not limited to BC', DE', and HL', and there are other combinations. On the other hand, one set of U register and SP register is provided for each register bank.

By the way, as described above, in the main control boards 300 and 500, the main CPU 300a controls the progress of the game in cooperation with the main RAM 300c based on the programs stored in the main ROM 300b. Programs for executing these functional units are arranged in predetermined areas (used areas) of the main ROM 300b and the main RAM 300c.

FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram showing a memory map. Since the memory map of the pachinko machine has already been described with reference to FIG. 5, the memory map of the slot machine 400 will be described here. The main ROM 500b is allocated a memory space of 0000h to 3FFFh (12 kbytes), the main RAM 500c is allocated a memory space of F000h to F3FFh (1 kbyte), and the input/output unit 704 is allocated FE00h to FEFFh (256 bytes). Allocated memory space. The instruction code of the program is written in assembler language. Here, the program is composed of instruction codes, is read by a computer, and can realize predetermined processing in cooperation with data and a work area.

A memory space from 0000h to 1DF3h of the main ROM 500b is assigned a usable area. The use area is an area for storing programs and data for executing game control processing for controlling the progress of the game. Specifically, initialization means 600, betting means 602, winning type lottery means 604, reel control means 606, determination means 608, payout control The instruction code of the program for executing the game control process for controlling the progress of the game by making the means 610, the game state control means 612, the effect state control means 614, and the command transmission means 616 function is stored, and 1200h to 1DF3h (3 0 kbytes), data used for the game control processing program is stored in the memory space (data area). A comment area is allocated to the memory space of 1E00h to 1FFFh, and a program management area is allocated to the memory space of 3FC0h to 3FFFh. Another area (unused area) is allocated to the memory space from 2000h to 3FBFh. The separate area is an area for storing programs and data that are not specified to be stored in the use area, as will be described later. Specifically, in the memory space from 2000h to 3FBFh, some or all of the game machine test processing and security-related processing that do not affect the progress of the game (hereinafter simply referred to as non-game control processing) is stored) and the instruction code and program data of the program that executes the Here, the gaming machine test processing is the testing processing of the slot machine 400 described in the connection specifications (4th edition) of the reel-type gaming machine testing machine. The security-related processing is processing to identify an abnormal state for the purpose of preventing fraud by a third party and finding defects, and includes, for example, determination of the above-described backup flag and execution of checksum. Note that there is no limitation on the storage capacity of the separate area, and in the example of FIG. 102, it can be freely allocated to storage areas other than the use area, comment area, and program management area.

A memory space of F000h to F1FFh of the main RAM 500c is allocated with a use area. Specifically, the memory space of F000h to F13Fh is assigned a work area for the game control process, and is used for variable management such as timers, counters, and flags. A stack area for the game control process is assigned to the memory space of F1C0h to F1FFh. Another area is allocated to the memory space of F200h to F3FFh of the main RAM 500c. More specifically, the memory spaces F210h to F22Fh are allocated work areas for some or all of the security-related processes, and are used for managing variables such as timers, counters, and flags. A stack area for part or all of the security-related processing is allocated to the memory spaces F230h to F246h.

An input/output unit 704 is assigned to the memory space of FE00h to FFFFh. Conventionally, in order to access the device corresponding to the input/output unit 704, an I/O space of 256 bytes was provided independently of the memory space. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the MREQ and IORQ signals are eliminated, and access to the memory and the input/output unit 704 is commonly performed by the RD and WR signals. A U register is provided as hardware for designating the upper 8-bit address for accessing the device connected to the input/output unit 704, and the 8-bit upper address is designated in advance. As a result, the I/O space provided independently of the memory space is integrated into the memory space to form one address space, and when the IN instruction and the OUT instruction are executed, the input/output unit 704 is assigned to the memory space. On the other hand, the upper 8 bits are specified by the U register, and the lower 8 bits can be accessed using the lower 8 bits specified by the operands of the IN and OUT instructions.

In this embodiment, the LDQ instruction uses the value of the Q register to access the memory space (mainly the data area and work area), and the IN and OUT instructions use the U register to access devices (timers, random number generators, external It becomes possible to describe a program so as to access I/O of an input/output circuit, etc.). Such a configuration makes it easier to grasp the program at the time of design. In addition, memory and I/O that have been accessed by specifying them with 16-bit addresses can now be accessed with lower 8-bit operands, and the program capacity can be compressed. Furthermore, by having a plurality of high-order designated registers such as the Q register, Q' register, and U register, the number of exchanges due to reuse of the high-order register is reduced compared to when there is only one high-order register, and the program capacity is further compressed. be able to.

Although the memory space corresponding to the I/O space is accessed by the IN instruction and the OUT instruction in the above example, the memory space may be directly accessed by the IN instruction and the OUT instruction. For example, when accessing three 256-byte areas on the memory, the upper 8 bits are specified in the Q register, Q' register, and U register, respectively, and the LDQ instruction, the IN instruction, and the OUT instruction are used to access each area. This can be achieved by accessing

<Register access method>
By the way, in a conventional microprocessor, an address space (memory space) to which the main ROM 500b and the main RAM 500c are assigned and an address space (I/O space) to which the input/output unit 704 is assigned are managed independently. . Here, the memory space to which the main ROM 500b and the main RAM 500c are allocated may be called a memory map, and the I/O space to which the input/output unit 704 is allocated may be called an I/O map.

Conventional microprocessors have had to access memory space and I/O space using dedicated instructions. For example, when a conventional microprocessor uses instructions dedicated to the memory space of the main ROM 500b and main RAM 500c, the main ROM 500b and main RAM 500c can be accessed by enabling the memory request (MREQ) terminal. Also, when a conventional microprocessor uses an instruction dedicated to the I/O space of the input/output unit 704, the input/output unit 704 can be accessed by enabling the I/O request (IORQ) terminal. Therefore, conventional microprocessors have had to change the instructions to be used depending on whether the object to be accessed is the main ROM 500 b or main RAM 500 c or the input/output unit 704 . Here, the conventional microprocessor accesses the input/output unit 704 allocated to the I/O space, reads information from the input/output unit 704 to the register, and writes information from the register to the input/output unit 704. This is called an I/O mapped I/O method.

However, as described above, in this embodiment, the address space of the input/output unit 704 is integrated with the address spaces of the main ROM 500b and the main RAM 500c, and the input/output unit 704 is assigned to FE00h to FFFFh of the memory space. Therefore, the concept of I/O space is no longer necessary, and the main CPU 500a can access the input/output unit 704 through addresses FE00h to FFFFh in the memory space. Here, the main CPU 500a accesses the input/output unit 704 through the memory map to which the input/output unit 704 is allocated, reads information from the input/output unit 704 to the register, and writes information from the register to the input/output unit 704. is called a memory-mapped I/O method.

Thus, in this embodiment, the main CPU 500a accesses the input/output unit 704 using the memory-mapped I/O method. On the other hand, from the viewpoint of general versatility, for example, the program of the conventional microprocessor can be used as it is, access by the I/O mapped I/O method is also possible in this embodiment. Therefore, in addition to the memory-mapped I/O method, the main CPU 500a can treat part of the memory space as an I/O space and access the input/output unit 704 by the I/O-mapped I/O method. . Although it was possible to access the input/output unit 704 by the memory-mapped I/O method even in a conventional microprocessor, it is possible to access the input/output unit 704 by using the I/O-mapped I/O method or by using the memory-mapped I/O method. Whether or not is a selection formula, and if the memory-mapped I/O method is selected, the I/O-mapped I/O method cannot be used.

FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the access method is used. The memory-mapped I/O method has the advantage of being able to use a large number of commands (instructions) prepared for accessing the main ROM 500b and main RAM 500c, such as LD instructions and LDIR instructions. On the other hand, the memory-mapped I/O method has a drawback that the command size becomes larger than that of the I/O-mapped I/O method when simply reading from and writing to the input/output unit 704 . On the other hand, the I/O mapped I/O method has the advantage that the command size can be smaller than the memory mapped I/O method when simply reading from and writing to the input/output unit 704 . On the other hand, the I/O mapped I/O method has the drawback that only limited commands (instructions) prepared for accessing the input/output unit 704, such as IN instructions and OUT instructions, can be used.

In a program, since simple reading and writing of the input/output unit 704 are common, it is possible to reduce the command size by using the I/O mapped I/O method instead of the memory mapped I/O method. . For example, when reading a value stored at a predetermined address in the input/output unit 704 to the A register, using a memory-mapped I/O command "LD A, (mn)" (mn is a 2-byte integer) , the command size needs to be 3 bytes, but if the I/O mapped I/O method command "IN A, (g)" (g is a 1-byte integer) is used, the command size is only 2 bytes. . Also, each time an attempt is made to access the input/output unit 704 using the memory mapped I/O method, the value of the Q register may have to be changed to the upper address of the input/output unit 704. size will increase. Therefore, the I/O mapped I/O method is normally used.

However, in part of the process of the program, using the memory-mapped I / O command (instruction) rather than the I / O mapped I / O command (instruction), game control processing It may be possible to reduce the capacity of the control area for performing Specifically, rather than accessing the same input/output unit 704 indicated by the same address allocated in the memory space through a command such as an IN command or an OUT command according to the I/O mapped I/O method, memory There are cases where the total command size is smaller when accessing through commands based on the mapped I/O method. Therefore, here, an appropriate access method that reduces the total command size is used according to the content of the processing.

FIG. 104 is a flowchart for explaining an example of subcommand transmission processing, and FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of specific commands for realizing the subcommand transmission processing. Such subcommand transmission processing is executed in step S100-65 of FIG. 23 and step S3100-11 of FIG. 98 described above. In the subcommand transmission process, a command message (command) is transmitted to the sub control boards 330 and 502 through the transmission buffer (FIFO). Here, for convenience of explanation, an example in which the main CPU 500a executes the subcommand transmission process S3100-11 will be given, and the process related to subcommand accumulated data that is not related to this embodiment will be omitted. The numerical values of step S in the description of FIG. 104 are used only in the description of this figure.

Here, the messages 1, 2, 3, and 4 constituting the 4-byte command messages to be sent to the sub control board 502 are set in the D register, E register, B register, and C register, respectively. . However, depending on the command message to be sent, the messages 2 to 4 may be set after the fact. In addition, if the electronic messages 3 and 4 are not set, the values obtained from the individual chip number register may be set as the electronic messages 3 and 4. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 104, first, the main CPU 500a saves the values of each register (S1), and determines whether messages 2 to 4 have already been set based on message 1 (S2). If telegrams 2 to 4 have been set (YES in S2), the main CPU 500a proceeds to step S6. S3), based on the message 1, it is determined whether or not the messages 3 and 4 have already been set (S4). If telegrams 3 and 4 have been set (YES in S4), the main CPU 500a proceeds to step S6. (S5).

Subsequently, the main CPU 500a sets the destination address (S6), sets telegram 2 as the augend (S7), and prohibits interrupts (S8). The main CPU 500a outputs the messages 1 to 4 (S9), calculates the checksums of the messages 1 to 4 (S10), and outputs the calculated checksums (S11). Finally, the main CPU 500a permits interrupts (S12) and restores the values of each register (S13).

Specifically, the index "CMDPROC" on the first line in FIG. 105 indicates the start address of the subcommand transmission process. The subcommand transmission process is called by the index "CMDPROC". The command "PUSH HL" on the second line saves the value of the HL register to the stack area, and the command "PUSH BC" on the third line saves the value of the BC register to the stack area. The commands on the second and third lines correspond to step S1 in FIG. 104 for saving the register value.

The value of the D register, that is, the value of telegram 1 is set in the A register by the command "LD A, D" on the fourth line of FIG. , A register is compared with the fixed value "B0H". As a result, if it is less than B0H (if the carry flag is set), the process moves to the index "CMDPROC01" on the 12th line. Thus, if the value of message 1 is less than B0H, the next process can be skipped and the process can be moved to the index "CMDPROC01" on the 12th line. The commands on the 4th and 5th lines correspond to step S2 in FIG. 104, in which if telegrams 2 to 4 have already been set, the process proceeds to step S6.

The command "LDQ A, (E)" on the sixth line in FIG. 105 sets the value of the Q register to the upper 1 byte of the address and the value of the E register to the lower 1 byte of the address, and stores them in the memory area indicated by the address. The 1-byte value (telegram 2) thus obtained is set in the A register, and the value of the A register, ie, telegram 2, is set in the E register by the command "LD E, A" on the seventh line. The commands on the 6th and 7th lines correspond to step S3 in FIG.

According to the command "JBIT Z, 3, D, CMDPROC01" on line 8 of FIG. Move to "CMDPROC01". Thus, if bit 3 of electronic message 1 is 0, the next process can be omitted and the process can move to the index "CMDPROC01" on the 12th line. The command on the eighth line corresponds to step S4 in FIG. 104, in which if telegrams 3 and 4 have already been set, the process proceeds to step S6.

The command "IN HL, (@CID_____)" on the 9th line in FIG. A 2-byte value stored in the memory area is input to the HL register. The command "LD B, H" on the 10th line sets the value of the H register to the B register, and the command "LD C, L" on the 11th line sets the value of the L register to the C register. The commands on the ninth to eleventh lines correspond to step S5 in FIG.

Subsequently, the value of the C register is set to the H register by the command "LD H, C" on the 13th line in FIG. Here, the C register used in the OUT instruction is released by transferring telegram 4 stored in the C register to the H register. The value of the address "@S1DT____" is set in the C register by the command "LD C,@S1DT____" on the 14th line. The address "@S1DT____" indicates a transmission buffer (FIFO) of a transmission-only asynchronous serial communication circuit. The commands on the 13th and 14th lines correspond to step S6 in FIG. 104 for setting the destination address.

The command "LD A, E" on the 15th line in FIG. 105 sets the value of the E register (telegram 2) to the A register. This is because the value of the A register is used as the augend when calculating the checksum in step S10 of FIG. The command on the 15th line corresponds to step S7 in FIG. 104 for setting telegram 2 in the A register. Then, the interrupt is prohibited by the command "DI" on the 16th line. The command on the 16th line corresponds to step S8 in FIG.

The command "OUT (C), D" on line 17 in FIG. A value (telegram 1) is output. The command "OUT (C), A" on the 18th line sets the value of the U register to the upper 1 byte of the address, the value of the C register to the lower 1 byte, and stores the value of the A register (telegram 2) is output. The command "OUT (C), B" on the 19th line sets the value of the U register to the upper 1 byte of the address, the value of the C register to the lower 1 byte, and stores the value of the B register (data message) in the memory area indicated by the address. 3) is output. The command "OUT (C), H" on the 20th line sets the value of the U register to the upper 1 byte of the address, the value of the C register to the lower 1 byte, and stores the value of the H register (telegram 4) is output. Here, data is output to the address "@S1DT____" in the order of the D register, A register (E register), B register, and H register (C register), that is, in the order of messages 1, 2, 3, and 4. The commands on the 17th to 20th lines correspond to step S9 in FIG. 104 for outputting messages 1 to 4.

The command "ADD A, D" on the 21st line in FIG. 105 adds the value of the D register (telegram 1) to the value of the A register (telegram 2), and the result is held in the A register. The command "ADD A, B" on the 22nd line adds the value of the B register (telegram 3) to the value of the A register (checksum value), and the result is held in the A register. The command "ADD A, H" on the 23rd line adds the value of the H register (telegram 4) to the value of the A register (checksum value), and the result is held in the A register. The commands on the 21st to 23rd lines correspond to step S10 in FIG.

The command "OUT (C), A" on the 24th line in FIG. A value (checksum value) is output. In this way, a command message of a total of 5 bytes consisting of the messages 1 to 4 and the checksum value is output to the transmission buffer. The command on the 24th line corresponds to step S11 in FIG. 104 for outputting the calculated checksum. Then, the interrupt is permitted by the command "EI" on the 25th line. The command on the 25th line corresponds to step S12 in FIG.

The data saved in the stack area is returned to the BC register by the command "POP BC" on the 26th line in FIG. 105, and the data saved in the stack area is returned to the HL Returned to register. The command on the 26th and 27th lines corresponds to step S13 in FIG. 104 for restoring the value of the register. Then, the command "RET" on the 28th line returns to the calling process.

In FIG. 105, the subcommand transmission processing in FIG. 104 is realized by the I/O mapped I/O method using IN instructions and OUT instructions. However, as described above, in some processes in a program, the use of memory-mapped I/O instructions may result in a smaller command size. An example in which the memory-mapped I/O method is applied to some processing will be described below.

FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an example of another command for realizing subcommand transmission processing. 105, 4-byte telegrams 1, 2, 3, and 4 to be transmitted to the sub-control board 502 are set in the D, E, B, and C registers, respectively.

Comparing the command group of FIG. 105 with the command group of FIG. 106, the command group indicated by (1) corresponding to step S5 and the command group indicated by (2) corresponding to steps S6 to S11 are different. ing. Here, the difference in the total command size will be explained by focusing on the command group (1) and the command group (2) respectively.

Regarding the command group of (1), the 2-byte value stored in the memory area indicated by the address "@CID____" is set in the BC register by the command "LD BC, (@CID_____)" on the ninth line in FIG. be. The command on the ninth line corresponds to step S5 in FIG.

In the example of FIG. 105, since the I/O mapped I/O system is used, the HL register can be selected as the setting destination of the value input by the IN instruction, but the BC register cannot be selected. In other words, the command "IN BC, (mn)" (where mn is a 2-byte integer) is not prepared as a command. Therefore, in the example of FIG. 105, the 2-byte value stored in the memory area indicated by the address "@CID____" must be temporarily held in the HL register and then transferred to the B and C registers. On the other hand, in the memory mapped I/O method of FIG. 106, by using the LD instruction, the 2-byte value stored in the memory area indicated by the address "@CID____" can be directly set in the BC register. can be done.

Here, the total command size of the command group in (1) of FIG. command "LD C, L" 1 byte=5 bytes, whereas the total command size of the command group (commands) in (1) of FIG. ” becomes 4 bytes. Therefore, it can be understood that the total command size can be reduced by 1 byte by changing the I/O mapped I/O method to the memory mapped I/O method.

Subsequently, for the command group (2), the 2-byte value of the address "@S2DT____" itself is set in the HL register by the command "LD HL,@S2DT____" on the 11th line in FIG. The address "@S2DT____" indicates the input buffer of the transmission-only asynchronous serial communication circuit. The command on the 11th line corresponds to step S6 in FIG. 104 for setting the destination address. In the example of FIG. 105, since the I/O mapped I/O system is used, the C register had to be released in order to use the OUT instruction. On the other hand, in the memory-mapped I/O method, the address of the transmission destination can be held in the HL register without the need to open the C register. Therefore, in the example of FIG. 106, the command "LD H, C" on line 13 of FIG. 105 can be deleted.

The command "LD A, E" on the 12th line in FIG. 106 sets the value of the E register (telegram 2) to the A register. The command on the 12th line corresponds to step S7 in FIG. 104 for setting telegram 2 in the A register. Then, the interrupt is prohibited by the command "DI" on the 13th line. The command on the 13th line corresponds to step S8 in FIG.

The command "LD (HL), D" on the 14th line in FIG. 106 stores the value of the D register (telegram 1) in the memory area indicated by the address of the HL register. The command "LD (HL), A" on the 15th line stores the value of the A register (telegram 2) in the memory area indicated by the address of the HL register. The command "LD (HL), B" on the 16th line stores the value of the B register (telegram 3) in the memory area indicated by the address of the HL register. The command "LD (HL), C" on the 17th line stores the value of the C register (telegram 4) in the memory area indicated by the address of the HL register. Here, data is stored in the order of the D register, A register (E register), B register, and C register, ie, in the order of messages 1, 2, 3, and 4, at the address "@S1DT___". The commands on the 14th to 17th lines correspond to step S9 in FIG.

The command "ADD A, D" on the 18th line in FIG. 106 adds the value of the D register (telegram 1) to the value of the A register (telegram 2), and the result is held in the A register. The command "ADD A, B" on the 19th line adds the value of the B register (telegram 3) to the value of the A register (checksum value), and the result is held in the A register. The command "ADD A, C" on the 20th line adds the value of the C register (telegram 4) to the value of the A register (checksum value), and the result is held in the A register. The commands on the 18th to 20th lines correspond to step S10 in FIG.

The command "LD (HL), A" on the 21st line in FIG. 106 stores the value of the A register (checksum value) in the memory area indicated by the address of the HL register. In this way, a total of 5-byte command messages including the messages 1 to 4 and the checksum value are stored in the transmission buffer. The command on the 21st line corresponds to step S11 in FIG. 104 for outputting the calculated checksum.

In the example of FIG. 105, an OUT instruction is used to output to the input/output unit 704 by the I/O mapped I/O method. On the other hand, in the memory mapped I/O method, the LD instruction can be used. Therefore, the command size can be reduced by holding the address of the transmission destination in the HL register instead of the C register and storing the value of each register in the memory area indicated by the address of the HL register with the LD instruction.

Here, the total command size of the command group of (2) in FIG. "LD A, E" 1 byte + 16th line command "DI" 1 byte + 17th line command "OUT (C), D" 2 bytes + 18th line command "OUT (C), A" 2 bytes + 19 lines 2nd command "OUT (C), B" 2 bytes + 20th line command "OUT (C), H" 2 bytes + 21st line command "ADD A, D" 1 byte + 22nd line command "ADD A, B" 1 byte + 23rd line command "ADD A, H" 1 byte + 24th line command "OUT (C), A" 2 bytes = 18 bytes, whereas the command group of (2) in Fig. 106 is the command "LD HL, @S2DT___" on the 11th line 3 bytes + the command "LD A, E" on the 12th line 1 byte + the command "DI" on the 13th line 1 byte + the command "LD (HL), D" 1 byte + 15th line command "LD (HL), A" 1 byte + 16th line command "LD (HL), B" 1 byte + 17th line command "LD (HL), C" " 1 byte + 18th line command "ADD A, D" 1 byte + 19th line command "ADD A, B" 1 byte + 20th line command "ADD A, C" 1 byte + 21st line command "LD ( HL), A" 1 byte=13 bytes.

Therefore, regarding the command group of (2), the total command size can be reduced by 5 bytes by changing the I/O mapped I/O method to the memory mapped I/O method. As can be understood by comparing the command group of FIG. 105 (2) with the command group of FIG. 106 (2), the total command size can be reduced by 1 byte each time the OUT instruction is replaced with the LD instruction.

As described above, in this embodiment, while accessing the input/output unit 704 by the I/O mapped I/O method, depending on the content of the processing, the memory mapped I/O method that reduces the total command size is used to access the input/output unit 704. 704 is accessed. In this way, by mixing the I/O mapped I/O method and the memory mapped I/O method in the same program and applying an access method that reduces the total command size depending on the content of the processing, the command It is possible to shorten and secure the capacity of the control area for performing the game control process.

<Usage example 1 of memory mapped I/O method>
As described above, the conventional microprocessor accesses the input/output unit 704 using the I/O mapped I/O method. In this case, the I/O space that can be assigned to the input/output unit 704 is limited to 256 bytes. In other words, in a conventional microprocessor, the input/output unit 704 can be specified by only one byte of address information.

FIG. 107 is a diagram showing part of a command group for implementing CPU initialization processing, and FIG. 108 is a diagram showing a table referred to in CPU initialization processing. Here, for convenience of explanation, the initialization processing (step S100-1 in FIG. 22 and step S2000-1 in FIG. 82) of the CPU initialization processing described above will be described. In the initial setting process, the input/output unit 704 is initialized by setting setting data in the input/output unit 704 (internal register). Here, an example in which the main CPU 500a executes the initial setting process S2000-1 will be given.

The command "LD HL, T_CPU_REG" on the first line in FIG. 107 sets the head address "T_CPU_REG" of the data group of the CPU built-in register setting data table, which is the read source, in the HL register. The number of setting data stored at the address "@NUM_CPU_REG" is set in the B register by the command "LD B, @NUM_CPU_REG" on the second line.

As can be understood by referring to the 48th line of the CPU built-in register setting data table in FIG. 108, the command "EQU ($-T_CPU_REG)/2" is written in the address "@NUM_CPU_REG". Here, "$" is the address next to the last address of the data group to be transferred, that is, the address "@NUM_CPU_REG" itself, and "T_CPU_REG" is the first address of the data group to be transferred. The value of T_CPU_REG (1-byte value indicating the number of data) is the total number of bytes of the 1-byte value. By dividing this value by 2, which is the number of combinations of addresses and values, the number of set data is derived. . For example, in the example of FIG. 108, the number of setting data is 30/2=15.

The index "INITIAL01" on the third line in FIG. 107 indicates the starting address of the repeated processing. By the command "LDIN AC, (HL)" on the fourth line, the 1-byte value stored in the memory area indicated by the address of the HL register is stored in the C register, and the address of the value obtained by adding "1" to the HL register. A 1-byte value stored in the memory area indicated by is stored in the A register. The command "OUT (C), A" on the fifth line outputs the value (setting data) of the A register to the memory area (internal register) indicated by the address of the C register.

For example, if the HL register has the value of the address "T_CPU_REG", the 1-byte value "@PT0PR__" in the third line of FIG. 108 is stored in the C register, and the 1-byte value "160" in the fourth line of FIG. is stored in the A register. Then, the value "160" of the A register is output to the memory area indicated by the address "@PT0PR__" of the C register.

Subsequently, the value of the B register is decremented (subtracted by "1") by the command "DJNZ INITIAL01" on the sixth line in FIG. If the result of decrementing is 0, the process moves to the next command after the current command. Here, since the number of data is "15", the value of the B register becomes 0 when the processing from the index "INITIAL01" is repeated 15 times.

In this way, the total command size of the commands for the initial setting process shown in FIG. 2 bytes of the command "LDIN AC, (HL)" + 2 bytes of the command "OUT (C), A" of the fifth line + 2 bytes of the command "DJNZ INITIAL01" of the sixth line = 11 bytes.

As described above, in this embodiment, the address space of the input/output unit 704 is integrated with the address spaces of the main ROM 500b and the main RAM 500c. Therefore, the main CPU 500a accesses the input/output unit 704 through addresses FE00h to FFFFh in the memory space. In this case, the memory space to which the input/output unit 704 can be allocated is 512 bytes. By increasing the memory space in this way, the number of input/output units 704 to be allocated can also be increased. On the other hand, since the memory space becomes larger than 256 bytes, 2 bytes are required as an address for specifying the input/output unit 704 . For example, in the present embodiment, some input/output units 704 are allocated in advance to FE00h to FEFFh, which are 256-byte areas in the memory space, and other input/output units 704 are allocated to 256-byte areas in the memory space. It is assigned to FF00h to FFFFh. Therefore, the main CPU 500a must change the value of the U register between "FEH" and "FFH" every time it accesses the input/output unit 704 with a different high-order byte of the address. Here, another embodiment for realizing the initialization processing shown in FIG. 107 using the U register will be described.

FIG. 109 is a diagram showing another example of part of a command group for implementing CPU initialization processing, and FIG. 110 is a diagram showing another example of a table referred to in CPU initialization processing. be. Here, as in FIGS. 107 and 108, the main CPU 500a sets setting data in the input/output unit 704 (built-in register) by the I/O mapped I/O method for convenience of explanation.

By the command "LDF HL, T_CPU_REG" on the first line in FIG. 109, the top address "T_CPU_REG" of the data group in the CPU built-in register setting data table in FIG. 110 is set in the HL register. The number of setting data stored at the address "@NUM_CPU_RG1" is set in the B register by the command "LD B, @NUM_CPU_RG1" on the second line.

As can be understood by referring to the 42nd line of the CPU built-in register setting data table in FIG. 110, the command "EQU ($-T_CPU_REG)/2" is described at the address "@NUM_CPU_RG1". Here, "$" is the address "@NUM_CPU_RG1" itself, and "T_CPU_REG" is the head address of the data group to be the transfer source, so the value of $-T_CPU_REG is the total number of bytes of the 1-byte value indicating the number of data. By dividing this value by 2, which is the number of combinations of addresses and values, the number of setting data is derived. For example, in the example of FIG. 110, the number of setting data is 26/2=13.

The command "LD U, 0FEH" on the third line in FIG. Here, two values "FEH" and "FFH" are prepared as high-order addresses of the addresses indicating the plurality of input/output units 704, and the main CPU 500a, depending on the input/output unit 704 to be accessed, each time , changes the value of the U register, which is the upper byte. The initial value of the U register is "FFH". Here, first, "FEH" is set in the U register ("FFH" is changed to "FEH"), and setting data is set for the input/output unit 704 whose upper address is "FEH".

The index "INITIAL01" on the fourth line in FIG. 109 indicates the starting address of the repeated processing. By the command "LDIN AC, (HL)" on the fifth line, the value stored in the memory area indicated by the address of the HL register is stored in the C register, and "1" is added to the value of the HL register. The value stored in the memory area is stored in the A register. The command "OUT (C), A" on the sixth line outputs the value (setting data) of the A register to the memory area (internal register) indicated by the address of the C register.

For example, if the HL register is the value of the address "T_CPU_REG", the 1-byte value "@PT0PR__" (for example, "01H") in the third line of FIG. 110 is stored in the C register, and the A 1-byte value "160" is stored in the A register. Then, the value "160" of the A register is output to the memory space indicated by the address "@PT0PR__" of the C register.

By the command "DJNZ INITIAL01" on the 7th line in FIG. 109, the value of the B register is decremented (subtracted by "1"). If the result is 0, the process moves to the next command after the command. Here, since the number of data is "13", the value of the B register becomes 0 when the processing from the index "INITIAL01" is repeated 13 times. In this way, setting of setting data for the thirteen input/output units 704 in the first stage of FIG. 110 is completed.

The command "LD U, 0FFH" on the eighth line in FIG. As described above, of the two values "FEH" and "FFH" as the address indicating the input/output unit 704, the setting data for the input/output unit 704 whose upper address is "FEH" has been completed. Here, "FFH" is set in the U register, and setting data is set for the input/output unit 704 whose upper address is "FFH". By setting "FFH" in the U register, the U register is returned to its initial value.

The number of setting data stored at the address "@NUM_CPU_RG2" is set in the B register by the command "LD B, @NUM_CPU_RG2" on the ninth line in FIG. As can be understood by referring to the 50th line of the CPU built-in register setting data table in FIG. 110, the address "@NUM_CPU_RG2" describes the command "EQU ($-T_CPU_REG)/2-@NUM_CPU_RG1". there is Here, "$" is the address "@NUM_CPU_RG2" itself, and "T_CPU_REG" is the top address of the 1-byte data group that is the transfer source. NUM_CPU_RG1" is 13, so in the example of FIG. 110, the number of setting data is 15-13=2.

The index "INITIAL02" on the 10th line in FIG. 109 indicates the starting address of the repeated processing. By the command "LDIN AC, (HL)" on the 11th line, the value stored in the memory area indicated by the address of the HL register is stored in the C register, and "1" is added to the value of the HL register. The value stored in the memory area is stored in the A register. The command "OUT (C), A" on the 12th line outputs the value (setting data) of the A register to the memory area (internal register) indicated by the address of the C register.

For example, if the HL register has the value of the address "@NUM_CPU_RG1", the 1-byte value "@S1CM____" (for example, "2CH") in line 44 of FIG. is stored in the A register. Then, the value "10000000B" of the A register is output to the memory space indicated by the address "@S1CM___" of the C register.

Subsequently, the value of the B register is decremented (subtracted by "1") by the command "DJNZ INITIAL02" on the 13th line of FIG. If the result of decrementing is 0, the process moves to the next command after the current command. Here, since the number of data is "2", the value of the B register becomes 0 when the processing from the index "INITIAL02" is repeated twice. In this way, the setting of the setting data for the two input/output units 704 in the latter stage of FIG. 110 is completed.

In this way, the total command size of the commands for the initial setting processing shown in FIG. command "LD U, 0FEH" 3 bytes + 5th line command "LDIN AC, (HL)" 2 bytes + 6th line command "OUT (C), A" 2 bytes + 7th line command "DJNZ INITIAL01" 2 Byte + 8th line command "LD U, 0FFH" 3 bytes + 9th line command "LD B, @NUM_CPU_RG2" 2 bytes + 11th line command "LDIN AC, (HL)" 2 bytes + 12th line command "OUT (C), A” 2 bytes+13th line command “DJNZ INITIAL02” 2 bytes=24 bytes.

In this case, since the U register must be changed in order to access a plurality of input/output units 704, the total command size is increased as compared with the example of FIG. However, as described above, in some processes in the program, the command size may be smaller if the instructions of the memory-mapped I/O method are used instead of the I/O-mapped I/O method. be. Therefore, an example in which the memory-mapped I/O method is applied to some processing will be described.

FIG. 111 is a diagram showing another example of part of a command group for implementing CPU initialization processing. Here, unlike FIGS. 107 and 109, the main CPU 500a sets setting data in the input/output unit 704 (built-in register) by the memory-mapped I/O method. Since the CPU built-in register setting data table of FIG. 110 can be used as it is as the CPU built-in register setting data table referred to in the CPU initialization process, the CPU built-in register setting data table will be explained using FIG.

By command "LDF HL, T_CPU_REG" on the first line in FIG. 111, the top address "T_CPU_REG" of the data group in the CPU built-in register setting data table (table containing transfer information) in FIG. is set to The command "LD B, @NUM_CPU_RG1" on the second line sets the number of setting data (the number to be transferred) stored at the address "@NUM_CPU_RG1" in the B register (first register).

As can be understood by referring to the 42nd line of the CPU built-in register setting data table in FIG. 110, the command "EQU ($-T_CPU_REG)/2" is described at the address "@NUM_CPU_RG1". Here, the value of $-T_CPU_REG is the total number of bytes of the 1-byte value indicating the number of data, and when this value is divided by 2, which is the number of combinations of addresses and values, the number of set data is 26/2=13. becomes.

The command "LD Q, HIGH @PTOPR__" on the third line in FIG. 111 sets the upper byte value ("FEH") of the address "@PTOPR__" in the Q register. Here, since the input/output unit 704 is accessed by the memory mapped I/O method, the upper byte of the input/output unit 704 is set in the QH register instead of the U register. As described above, two values "FEH" and "FFH" are prepared as addresses indicating the input/output unit 704, and the main CPU 500a changes the high-order byte according to the input/output unit 704 to be accessed each time. The value of the Q register is changed. The initial value of the Q register is "F0H" corresponding to the top address of the main RAM 500c. Here, first, "FEH" is set in the Q register (third register), and setting data is set for the input/output unit 704 whose upper address is "FEH".

The command "LDINTQR (HL)" on the fourth line in FIG. 111 sets the value of the Q register to the upper 1 byte of the transfer destination address, and sets the value stored in the memory area indicated by the address of the HL register to the lower order of the transfer destination address. The value stored in the memory area indicated by the address obtained by adding "1" to the value of the HL register as 1 byte is transferred to the memory area indicated by the transfer destination address, and the value of the HL register is changed to "2". is added to update the address to be transferred next, the value of the B register is decremented (subtracted by "1"), and the process is repeated until the decremented result becomes 0, that is, the set data 13 times. In this way, setting of setting data for the thirteen input/output units 704 in the first stage of FIG. 110 is completed. With such an LDINTQR instruction, processing is executed without using registers other than the B, HL, and Q registers, such as the A register.

The command "LD B, @NUM_CPU_RG2" on the fifth line in FIG. 111 sets the number of set data (the number to be transferred) stored at the address "@NUM_CPU_RG2" in the B register (first register). As can be understood by referring to the 50th line of the CPU built-in register setting data table in FIG. 110, the address "@NUM_CPU_RG2" describes the command "EQU ($-T_CPU_REG)/2-@NUM_CPU_RG1". there is Here, the value of $-T_CPU_REG (1-byte value indicating the number of data) is 30/2=15, and "@NUM_CPU_RG1" is 13, so in the example of FIG. 110, the number of setting data is 15-13= 2.

The command "LD Q, HIGH @S2CMS__" on the sixth line in FIG. 111 sets the upper byte value ("FFH") of the address "@S2CMS__" in the Q register (third register). In this case as well, since the input/output unit 704 is accessed by the memory-mapped I/O method, the upper byte of the input/output unit 704 is set in the QH register instead of the U register. As described above, of the two values "FEH" and "FFH" as the address indicating the input/output unit 704, setting of the setting data for the input/output unit 704 with the higher address "FEH" is completed. Therefore, here, "FFH" is set in the Q register, and setting data is set for the input/output unit 704 whose upper address is "FFH".

By the command "LDINTQR (HL)" on the 7th line in FIG. 111, the value of the Q register is set to the upper 1 byte of the transfer destination address, and the value stored in the memory area indicated by the address of the HL register (second register) is The value stored in the memory area indicated by the address obtained by adding "1" to the value of the HL register, which is the lower 1 byte of the transfer destination address, is transferred to the memory area indicated by the transfer destination address. The address to be transferred next is updated by adding "2" to the value, the value of the B register is decremented (subtracted by "1"), and the decremented result becomes 0, that is, the setting data is set twice. The process is repeated. In this way, the setting of the setting data for the two input/output units 704 in the latter stage of FIG. 110 is completed. With such an LDINTQR instruction, processing is executed without using registers other than the B, HL, and Q registers, such as the A register.

Then, the command "LD Q, HIGH @RAM_BGN_ADR" on the eighth line in FIG. 111 sets the upper byte value of the address "@RAM_BGN_ADR" in the Q register. Thus, the value of the Q register is restored to the initial value "F0H".

In this way, the total command size of the commands for the initialization processing shown in FIG. command "LD Q, HIGH @PTOPR__" 2 bytes + 4th line command "LDINTQR (HL)" 2 bytes + 5th line command "LD B, @NUM_CPU_RG2" 2 bytes + 6th line command "LD Q, HIGH @ S2CMS__” 2 bytes + 7th line command “LDINTQR (HL)” 2 bytes + command “LD Q, HIGH @RAM_BGN_ADR” 1 byte = 15 bytes.

Here, the I/O mapped I/O method of FIG. 109 is changed to the memory mapped I/O method as shown in FIG. 111, and accordingly the LDINTQR instruction can be used. 109 is 24 bytes, the total command size of the initialization processing command in FIG. 111 is 15 bytes, so that 9 bytes can be reduced. Thus, by using the LDINTQR instruction by the memory-mapped I/O method, it is possible to shorten the command and secure the capacity of the control area for performing the game control process.

<Usage example 2 of memory mapped I/O method>
FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram showing the addresses of the output ports, and FIG. 113 is a diagram showing part of a command group for realizing the saving process at power failure. Here, for convenience of explanation, the output port clearing process (step S300-11 in FIG. 25 and step S3000-11 in FIG. 97) in the saving process S3000 at power failure will be described. In the output port clear processing, the output of the output port is cleared to 0. Here, an example in which the main CPU 500a executes the output port clearing process S3000-11 will be given.

In this embodiment, a total of 9 output ports, output ports 0 to 8, are prepared as the input/output unit 704 . The output ports 0 to 8 can continuously output discrete signals (binary values of Hi (high level) and Low (low level)) bit by bit. Note that the target of the output port clear processing is limited to a total of 6 output ports 0 to 4 and 7 among the output ports 0 to 8. FIG. Therefore, output ports 0 to 4 and 7 are cleared in the output port clear processing.

Referring to FIG. 112, output port 4 is assigned to address "FFF0H" in the memory space, output port 3 is assigned to address "FFF1H", output port 2 is assigned to address "FFF2H", and address "FFF3H" is assigned. is assigned output port 1, address "FFF4H" is assigned output port 0, and address "FFF5H" is assigned output port 7.

The output port clearing process of FIG. 113 is performed only when "0" is set in the A register. When the output port clearing process is executed, "0" is already set in the A register. It means that By the command "LD BC, 6*256+@OUT_PRT_7" on the first line in FIG. 113, 6, which is the number of output ports, is set in the B register, and the lower 1-byte address value indicating output port 7 is set in the C register. be. Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 112, the value of the lower 1 byte indicating the output port 7 is "F5H". By the command "OUT (C), A" on the third line, the value of the U register (here, the initial value "FFH") is set to the upper 1 byte of the address, the value of the C register is set to the lower 1 byte, and the address The value of the A register (“0”) is output to the memory area indicated by .

The command "DEC C" on the fourth line in FIG. 113 decrements the value stored at the address indicated by the C register by one. The command "DJNZ PRFPROC02" on the fifth line decrements the value of the B register (subtracts "1"), and if the decremented result is not 0, the index "PRFPROC02" on the second line is reached, If it is 0, the process moves to the next command after the command. Here, since the number of output ports is "6", the value of the B register becomes 0 when the processing from the index "PRFPROC02" is repeated six times.

In this way, the address of the input/output unit 704 is decremented in the order of "FFF5H"→"FFF4H"→"FFF3H"→"FFF2H"→"FFF1H"→"FFF0H". Each bit of the output port is set to 0 in the order of →output port 2 →output port 3 →output port 4.

Thus, the total command size of the commands for the output port clear processing shown in FIG. 2 bytes+4th line command "DEC C" 1 byte+5th line command "DJNZ PRFPROC02" 2 bytes=8 bytes.

As described above, in some processes of a program, the command size may be smaller by using instructions of the memory-mapped I/O method instead of the I/O-mapped I/O method. Therefore, an example in which the memory-mapped I/O method is applied to some processing will be described.

FIG. 114 is a diagram showing another example of part of the command group for realizing the saving process at power-off. Here, the main CPU 500a clears the output of the output port to 0 by the memory mapped I/O method.

A command "LD HL, @OUT_PRT_4" on the first line in FIG. 114 sets a 2-byte address "@OUT_PRT_4" (output port information) indicating output port 4 in the HL register (second register). As shown in FIG. 112, the 2-byte value indicating output port 4 is "FFF0H". The command "LD B, 6" on the second line sets 6, which is the number of output ports to be cleared (the number to be cleared), in the B register (first register).

By the command "CLRIRS" on the third line in FIG. 114, "0" is stored in the memory area indicated by the address of the HL register (the output port is cleared), "1" is added to the value of the HL register, and then The address to be cleared is updated, the value of the B register is decremented (subtracted by "1"), and the process is repeated until the decremented result becomes 0, that is, six times, which is the number of output ports to be cleared. . With such a CLRIRS instruction, processing is executed without using registers other than the B and HL registers, such as the A register.

In this way, the address of the input/output unit 704 is incremented in the order of "FFF0H"→"FFF1H"→"FFF2H"→"FFF3H"→"FFF4H"→"FFF5H". The outputs of the output ports are set to 0 in the order of →output port 1 →output port 0 →output port 7.

In this way, the total command size of the commands for the output port clear processing shown in FIG. Second command "CLRIRS" 2 bytes=7 bytes.

Here, the I/O mapped I/O method of FIG. 113 is changed to the memory mapped I/O method as shown in FIG. 114, and the CLRIRS instruction can be used accordingly. Then, the total command size of the output port clear processing command in FIG. 113 is 8 bytes, whereas the total command size of the output port clear processing command in FIG. 114 is 7 bytes. Become. Thus, by using the CLRIRS instruction by the memory-mapped I/O method, it is possible to shorten the command and secure the capacity of the control area for performing the game control process.

In the example of FIG. 114, the use of the CLRIRS instruction eliminates the need to use the A register. Therefore, the value of the A register is not unintentionally updated. For example, if the A register has already been used, normally it would have been necessary to save the A register, but since the A register is not used here, there is no need to save it. In this way, it becomes possible to effectively use resources. In the example of FIG. 113, it is assumed that the value "0" is set in advance in the A register. The process of setting "0" is also unnecessary. In this way, it becomes possible to further shorten the command and secure the capacity of the control area for performing the game control process.

Although the preferred embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the accompanying drawings, it goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to such embodiments. It is obvious that a person skilled in the art can conceive of various modifications or modifications within the scope of the claims, and it should be understood that these also belong to the technical scope of the present invention. be done.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main control boards 300, 500 and the sub-control boards 330, 502 are arranged to share the function parts for progressing the game, but the function parts of the main control boards 300, 500 may be arranged on the sub-control boards 330 and 502, the functional units of the sub-control boards 330 and 502 may be arranged on the main control boards 300 and 500, and all the functional units may be integrated into one control board. can also be distributed.

Further, each processing performed by the main control boards 300, 500 and the sub-control boards 330, 502 described above does not necessarily have to be processed chronologically according to the order described in the flow chart, and may include parallel or subroutine processing. It's okay.

100 Gaming machines 300, 500 Main control boards 300a, 500a Main CPU
300b, 500b Main ROM
300c, 500c Main RAM
400 slot machine

Claims (2)

A CPU, a ROM storing a program used by the CPU, a RAM holding variables updated by the program, and an input/output different from the ROM and the RAM on a predetermined board used for the progress of the game. A gaming machine comprising:
The CPU
reading the program from the ROM;
Set the number to be cleared in the first register,
setting an address specifying information of an output port, which is a part of the input/output unit, in a second register;
repeating a predetermined process for the value stored in the first register;
The predetermined process is
clearing the value stored at the address indicated by the value of the second register;
The game machine is a process of updating the second register with a value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the second register. 2. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein said predetermined process is a CLRIRS instruction that can be executed without using registers other than said first register and said second register.

Images